Adobe Using FrameMaker (2015 Release) Frame Maker 2015 Operation Manual En

User Manual: adobe FrameMaker - 2015 - Operation Manual Free User Guide for Adobe FrameMaker Software, Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 983

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Using Adobe FrameMaker
(2015 release)

December 1, 2015

Contents

Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What is FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Author and enrich content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Manage and collaborate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Publish across multiple channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Supported software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Authoring modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FrameMaker mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Structured FrameMaker mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FrameMaker XML Author mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Choose an authoring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
What’s new in Adobe FrameMaker 2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Structured authoring and XML Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Simplified XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
DITA 1.3 support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Structure view enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
MathML object enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
EDD enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ditaval support in DITA-OT publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Preview child map in DITA maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Right-to-left language support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Bi-directional content authoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Bi-directional content publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Bi-directional content flipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Authoring and productivity enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Revamped Word import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Create mini TOCs for documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Improved visual conditional indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

i

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Table Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Conditional text at book level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
UI Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Package related files into a zip file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
FrameMaker connector enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Publishing enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
XSLT enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Enable browse sequences in Microsoft HTML output (CHM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Layout icons optimized for high resolution Retina display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Farsi publishing support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Publishing to Digital Publishing Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Dynamic Content Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Mobile app output support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
New Responsive HTML5 layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Support for XML sitemap in the Responsive HTML5 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Enhanced search results in HTML5 layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Out-of-the-box support for social widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Maintain TOC state in Responsive HTML5 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Embed custom fonts in EPUB output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SVG Support in HTML5 output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
HTML page templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Use and customize the skins for WebHelp output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Installation and registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Available in languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Install FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
General resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
FrameMaker basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Welcome screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Standard workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Save a custom workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Switch workspaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Reset a workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Rename a custom workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Delete a custom workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Document window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Tabbed documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Pods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Close pods and tab groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Pod list area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting pod location criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

ii

Toolbar icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Smart catalogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Status bar controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Zoom in and out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Turn pages and set scrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Go to another page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Viewing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Faster page display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Preset display units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Spacing of ruler or grid intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Line numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Visual guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Text symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Subset of menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
High-contrast workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Preferences dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Contextual tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Contextual tips preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Manage open files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Save files on file close and exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Save and close open files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Restore last session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Conditions to restore last session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Steps to restore the last session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Preferences for alerts on restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Restore dimensions of Resource Manager views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tips to work with the user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Launch the soft keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Create a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Use a template to create a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Create a blank document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Set the direction of a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Open a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Open a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Open a text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Open a document in use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Open a document without updating references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Reopen a file after a system crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Troubleshooting unavailable fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Save a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Save a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Save a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Save all open documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Return to the saved version of your document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

iii

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

File formats you can save in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Filename extensions for saved files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Save documents in text-only format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Use Save As to export XML from unstructured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Back up and save automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Add metadata to a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Apply a template to an open document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Templates in FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Available import and update settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Import formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Document direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Inheritance design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Caret location and movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Asian language support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Page layout and templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Paragraph formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Paragraph Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Create a paragraph format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Character formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Character Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Create a character format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Manage formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Update formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Rename or delete formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Apply formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Tips for creating new formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Specify formats for the paragraphs that follow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Add graphics to paragraph formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Format catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Display formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Delete formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Replace fonts using the Fonts pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Manual font changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Font changes using the designers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Adjust superscripted, subscripted, and small cap text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Condense and expand characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Create or change combined fonts of Japanese and Western characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Background color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Set background color of text within a paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Set background color of entire paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Set background color of a paragraph box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Indentation, alignment, and spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Change paragraph alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

iv

Change tab stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Change paragraph and character spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Adjust spacing in Japanese documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Lists and autonumbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Format text as numbered lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Format text as bulleted lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Specify a special bullet symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Remove autonumbering or a bullet from a paragraph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Counters in autonumber formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Base autonumbering on book component numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Base autonumbering on section numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Use multiple counters in an autonumber format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Reset a series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
About Japanese numbering options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
About RTL numbering options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Master and reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Body, master, and reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Master pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Create custom master pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Create a custom master page that is empty or based on another master page’s layout . 104
Create a custom master page based on a body page’s layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Reorder, rotate, or delete custom master pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Reorder custom master pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Rotate a master page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Rename or delete a custom master page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Assign master pages to body pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Assign a different master page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Assign a master page to pages with specified paragraph tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Assign a master page to body pages of structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Display master pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
View other master pages when a master page is visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Return to body pages while master pages are visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
View, create, and delete reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Display reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
View other reference pages when a reference page is visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Create a reference page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Return to body pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Rename or delete a reference page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Use reference frames on reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Create a reference frame on a reference page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Rename a reference frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Change other properties of a reference frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Set up boilerplate graphics on reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Page layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Change page size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

v

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Change pagination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Add or delete empty pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Change page margins and number of columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Headers, footers, and other background text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Creating and modifying background text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Entering header or footer information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Changing page layout on specific pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
About layout overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Change margins and column layout on specific pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Add a template text frame on a master page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Adding text frames on body pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Updating body and master page layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Creating one-time-only page layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Align text across columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Balance text across columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Feather text to the bottom of text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Synchronizing baselines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Multiflow documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Set up a multiflow document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
About text flows and flow tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Set up a side-by-side flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Set up a flow for a newsletter or magazine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Control the flow of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Change a flow’s tag or Autoconnect setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Add a new, disconnected page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Delete disconnected pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Connect text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Disconnect text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Remove a text frame from the middle of a flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Split or unsplit text frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Cross-reference a disconnected text frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Tracking a text flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Set flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Design the page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Designing text formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Standardizing graphics, frames, and tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Setting up numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Define special text and fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Set up HTML options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Create templates for generated files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Create templates to change conditional tags settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Change templates for blank paper and text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Change the template for blank paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Change the template for text files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Import formats from a template or document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

vi

Import formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
About import and update settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Editing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Text and special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Add text and special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Copy, move, and delete text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Drag and drop text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Importing and linking files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Import and link methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Use the clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Use drag-and-drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Use the File > Import > File command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Use the File > Import > Object command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Using paths when importing by reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Import text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Import formatted text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Import unformatted text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Import graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Import a graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Import JPEG 2000 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Import SVG images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Import Adobe Photoshop files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Import Adobe Illustrator files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Locate missing graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Locate a graphic FrameMaker can’t find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
View an imported graphic’s filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Insert imported graphic elements into structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Import movies, SWF files, and 3D objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Import movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Import a SWF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Import 3D objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Poster file for a media file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Import other files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Import PageMaker and QuarkXPress files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Import PDF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Import MIF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Import Microsoft Word files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Import Microsoft Excel files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Import formatting properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Import formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Format settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
About formatting overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Find and remove overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Import properties from a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
vii

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Placing and displaying equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Inline and display equations in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Equations in graphic frames in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Equations pod overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Create equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Create an inline equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Create an equation in a paragraph of its own (a display equation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Create an equation in a graphic frame with other objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Insert math elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
About the scope of operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Insert a math element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Insert a text string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Insert, add, or edit a horizontal or vertical list of expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Insert symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Insert operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Insert large elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Insert delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Insert relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Insert calculus elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Insert matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Insert functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Insert a custom math element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Shrinkwrap or unwrap an equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Edit equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Extend a selection using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Change the selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Replace or delete a math element or equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Remove delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Toggle an element format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Add an operand to a math element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Change matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Create and define math elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Math element types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Define a custom math element or change a built-in math element definition . . . . . . . . . 191
Find the name of a math element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Change or delete a custom math element definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Position math elements in an equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Adjust the spacing values for a math element wherever it appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Set line breaks and align equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Change equation line breaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Align display equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Set automatic alignment for a vertical list or multiline equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Clear a manual alignment point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Align items in a horizontal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Align cells in a matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

viii

Check alignment settings for a horizontal or vertical list, or for a matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Left-, center-, or right-align equations in a frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Align equations along a point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Change font settings in equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Change the character format in individual equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Change equation fonts throughout a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Evaluating equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Transform or evaluate an expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Matrix Commands pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Addition pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Multiplication pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Division pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Evaluation pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Rules pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Other Rewrites pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Add a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Generate a list of markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Delete a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Create a custom marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Add a custom marker to your document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Publish options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Pagination with Page Break marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Context-sensitive Help marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Apply index markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Create Dynamic HTML effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Hypertext commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Add hypertext commands to documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Define an active area in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Associate a hypertext command with an active area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Edit and delete hypertext commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Editing a hypertext command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Deleting a hypertext command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Available hypertext commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Display alert messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Navigate to a named destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Navigate to a specific page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Navigate back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Open documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Button Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Go to URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Open external applications and files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Close FrameMaker and FrameMaker documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
PDF and HTML: Hypertext command support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Create an image map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Multiple Undo/Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

ix

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Undo and Redo commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Document-level command history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Repeat Last Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
History pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Find / Change dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Types of search items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Unicode text search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Special character and nonprinting symbol search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Regular expression configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Spelling Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Run Spelling Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Set Spelling Checker to skip text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Correct spelling errors automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Change Spelling Checker options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Check spelling in different languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Control hyphenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Change word hyphenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Prevent FrameMaker from hyphenating a word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Rehyphenate an entire document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
About FrameMaker dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Dictionary Functions dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Dictionaries for other languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Create another personal dictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Change site dictionaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Edit dictionary files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Thesaurus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Export text and graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Using Save As to export to other formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Saving MIF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Send files in e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Save a document containing SWF files as PDF, HTML, and XML files . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Save documents containing SWF files as PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Save documents containing SWF files as HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Save documents with SWF files as XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Print a FrameMaker file with SWF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Save a structured document in SGML or XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Multilanguage authoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Unicode support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
About Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Enable Unicode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Adding multilingual text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Asian language support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Character sets and encoding methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Inline input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

x

Typesetting rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Combined Asian and Western fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Text import and export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Autonumbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Index sorting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Exporting Chinese, Korean, or Japanese documents to HTML or XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Structured FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
HTML output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Preparing documents for conversion to HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
About HTML documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
HTML conversion overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Preserve the FrameMaker look by using style sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Format overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Add links to URLs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Create links that simulate a TOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Setting up links for image maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Specifying graphics conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Set up and adjust HTML mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Set up or modify HTML mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Autolevel mappings for headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Mappings for lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Mappings for cross-reference formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Fine-tuning mappings by editing reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Use the Headings reference page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Edit the HTML Mapping table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Edit a mapping using the HTML Mapping table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Convert special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Save a document in HTML format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Use HTML conversion macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Create or edit an HTML conversion macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Use building blocks in HTML conversion macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Redefining HTML system macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Customize titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Insert HTML code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Convert books to HTML files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Troubleshooting and tips on HTML conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Saving structured documents as HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Publishing options for online output formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
About tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Tables formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Working with tables in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Elements for structured tables and table parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
How structured tables are formatted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
xi

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

DITA support for tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Insert, move, or remove a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Insert a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Insert a table element (structured documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Use an invalid table element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Nest a table in a table cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Copy, move, or remove a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Text and graphics in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Select text or cells in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Place the insertion point in a table cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Select the contents of a cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Select a single cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Select multiple cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Add or remove a table title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Add continuation text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Add continuation text to a selected table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Add continuation text to multiple tables in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Place graphics in table cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Place a graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Place a graphic in a structured document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Convert between text and tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Convert text to a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Convert a text file to a table as you open the file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Convert a text file to a table as you import the file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Touch up a table after conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Convert a table to text within FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Copy a table to another application as text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Convert all tables in a document to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Run text around a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Run text around a table in an anchored frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Run text around a table in an anchored frame (structured documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Run text around a table that remains stationary on the page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Position and autonumber text within cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Set default cell margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Customize cell margins or text alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Specify the direction of autonumbering in a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Change the direction of text in table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Formatting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Table Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Display the Table Designer and a property group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Apply property changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Reset properties after changing them in the Table Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Table catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Apply or change table format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Create, edit, and delete table formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Create a table format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xii

Rename a table format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Delete a table format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Apply a different format to a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Redefine table formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Change properties in multiple table formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Ruling and shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Set up regular ruling and shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Manage ruling styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Manage custom ruling and shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Add and delete rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Copy, move, or reorder rows or columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Resize rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Sort rows and columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Table position and spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Specify table position and spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Straddle or unstraddle tables and cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Straddle a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Unstraddle a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Straddle or unstraddle cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Rotate cells and tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Rotate cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Insert a rotated table in a page of unrotated text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Insert a rotated table in a page of unrotated text (structured documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Create a rotated table on a page with other rotated text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Edit a rotated table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Insert page breaks in a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Set the minimum number of rows on a page or in a column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Keep rows together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Add or remove a page break in a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Graphics and objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Create graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
About graphics and objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Working with illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Tools palette overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
About paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
About graphic elements in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Draw objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Draw a straight line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Draw a polyline or polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Draw an arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Draw a freehand curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Draw a rectangle, a rounded rectangle, or an oval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Draw a regular polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Draw several objects of the same type without clicking the tool each time . . . . . . . . . . . 342
xiii

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Select objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Select an object or multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Deselect objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Apply and change drawing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Apply a fill pattern or pen pattern to a selected object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Choose a line width for a line or an object’s border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Change the ends of an arc, a line, a polyline, or a freehand curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Make a line or object’s borders solid or dashed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Inspect an object’s drawing properties or apply them to other objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Change line width settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Change the line end style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Change the dashed line style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Change the arrow style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Add text to graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Add a text line to a graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Add a text frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Fix text frames that overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Create reverse text in a text frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Create a reverse text line over an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Add a title to an illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Run text around graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Copy and arrange objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Cut, copy, or paste an object by using the clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Copy an object by dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Delete an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Move an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Change the stacking order of objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Use gravity and grids to align objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Align text lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Distribute objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Make lines intersect cleanly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Group and ungroup objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Join lines and curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Flip and rotate objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Flip an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Create a symmetrical object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Rotate objects by dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Rotate an object precisely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Crop or mask graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Crop the edges of a graphic frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Mask an area within a graphic frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Measure object size and position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Measure an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
View the position of an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
View the position of an object as you move it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Measure any distance on the page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xiv

Resize and reshape objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Resize an object by dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Resize an object precisely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Resize imported graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Change the size of bitmap graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Move a corner of a polyline or polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Add or remove a corner or reshape handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Reshape a curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Change the corner radius of a rounded rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Smooth and unsmooth objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
About color and color models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Color models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Manage color libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
View color definitions in a color library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Add a color library for use in FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Work with color in objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Apply a color or tint to text or an object using formatting features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Apply a tint to an object using a fill pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Define and modify colors and tints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Assign a color to an object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Set up and display color views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Anchored frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
About anchored frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Create anchored frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Create an anchored frame automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Create an anchored frame with specific options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Inline anchored frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Anchored frames in a column of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Anchored frames in multicolumn layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Anchored frames outside a column of text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Anchored frames in the page margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Anchored frames run into paragraph text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Insert anchored frames in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Fill and edit anchored frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Filling anchored frames in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Put graphics or text in a graphic frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Prevent an anchored frame from clipping its contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Change a frame’s anchoring position and drawing properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Resize an anchored frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Copy, move, or delete an anchored frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Add object attributes for tagged PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Embed objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Embed text and graphics with OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Embed only part of a file with OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

xv

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Embed an entire file with OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Embed by dragging with OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Link to a text or graphic object with OLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Link to part of a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Link to an entire file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Edit OLE objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Edit an embedded OLE object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Edit a linked OLE object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Control the updating of OLE links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Change the updating of a linked OLE object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Suppress the updating of all linked OLE objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Manually update a single OLE link object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Cancel an OLE link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Import text into structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Change direction of document containing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Create hotspots using hotspot properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Create hotspots using graphics toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Delink a hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Create hotspots in vector graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Object styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Object style designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Object style catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Create an object style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Create an object style from an object’s properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Apply an object style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Import object formats from another document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
3D and multimedia objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Insert a link to a 3D object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
3D object part links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Create 3D links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Insert links to an SWF file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Insert links to an FLV file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Set poster for a SWF, FLV, or MP4 files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Set poster for a 3D object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Insert multimedia links table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Edit multimedia links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Attach custom JavaScript™ to a 3D object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Use object handle in JavaScript™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Activate 3D/multimedia objects by default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Display 3D/multimedia objects in pop-up windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
QR codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Generate and insert a QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Editing QR codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Using RoboScreenCapture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Capturing and inserting images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xvi

Editing imported images . .
Edit with Adobe Illustrator . .
Insert Photoshop images . . .
Editing Photoshop graphics
Insert Adobe Captivate demos

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

417
418
419
419
419

Books and long documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Book building workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Set up hierarchical books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Create books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Create a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Add files to a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Associate a structured application with an XML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Add generated files to a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Add a folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Rename a folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Associate a template with a folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Add file information for a folder template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Add a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Add a child book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Direction of a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Manage books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Manage book files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Display filenames or heading text in the book window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Exclude book components from output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Select book components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Rearrange and delete files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Rename files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Revert to a previously saved version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Open, close, or save files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Compare documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Apply book-wide commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Add metadata to books and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Document and page numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
About numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Set up numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Insert book component numbers in cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Include book component numbers in headers and footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Include the total page count of a book in a header or footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Print a book file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Create a PostScript file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Change and import formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Import formats into book files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Import element definitions into structured books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Set up a book file to create a master TOC or index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Generate and update books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
xvii

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Update a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Update a book with child books and XML files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Update a structured book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Remove inherited information from structured files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Edit and validate book structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Validate structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Clear all special cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Tables of contents and other lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
About generated files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
About tables of contents and other lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Lists of paragraphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Lists of markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Indexes of markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Lists and indexes of references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Generate a table of contents or list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Generate a table of contents or list for a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Generate a table of contents or list for a single document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Generating TOCs and other lists in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Add a title or other static text to lists and indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Generate a miniature table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Create a mini TOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Update a mini TOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Delete a mini TOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Embed TOCs in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Embed a TOC in a document by using cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Embed a TOC in a structured document by using cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Embed a TOC in a document as a text inset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Maintain a TOC embedded in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Update and edit TOCs and lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Update a TOC or list that is part of a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Add or remove paragraph tags from a TOC or list that is part of a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Update a TOC or list that is a stand-alone document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Find the source of list entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Find and select a paragraph by using Find/Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Edit and delete list entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Creating indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Create index entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Inserting an index marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Insert index marker elements (structured documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Insert an index marker without typing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Place several entries in one marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Create an index subentry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Create a cross-reference in an index entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Use page ranges in index entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Format text in an index entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Work with group titles in indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xviii

Change the groupings and group titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Create an index without group titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Create an index with neither a group title nor a space between entry groupings . . . . . . 460
Create quick access to group titles in a hypertext document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Change sort order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Specify sort order for an index entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Specify sort order for an index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Sort letter by letter instead of word by word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Specify characters to ignore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Sort symbols, numbers, or other characters in another location in an index . . . . . . . . . . 463
Specify the sort order for Japanese . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Generate indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Generate an index for a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Generate an index for a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Generate a standard index that displays page numbers in a variety of ways . . . . . . . . . . 466
Update and edit indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Update an index that is part of a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Add or remove items included in an index that is part of a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Update an index that is a stand-alone document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Find the source of index entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Find the source of an index entry by using a link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Select a marker by using Find/Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Add, edit, or delete markers and marker types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Edit or delete a marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Add or delete a custom marker type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Copy a marker type from one document to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Rename a marker type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Formatting lists and indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Format a list or index with a template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Edit special text flow for a list or index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Change paragraph and character formats of entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Change the paragraph format of entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Change the character format of entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Include book component and paragraph autonumbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Include volume and chapter autonumbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Include paragraph autonumbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Change page number separators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Manually add text to entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Use tabs and tab leaders in a list or index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Rearrange information in list entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Resolve cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Resolve a cross-reference when a marker has been deleted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Resolve a cross-reference when the ID and ID Reference values do not match (structured
documents) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Create the glossary term definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

xix

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Apply the glossary marker to the occurrences of the term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Footnotes and endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Create and edit footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Insert, edit, and delete footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Format footnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Create and maintain endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Create an endnote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Create an endnote in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Maintain endnotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Troubleshooting books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Interpreting error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Troubleshooting TOCs and lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Troubleshooting indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Single-sourcing content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Conditional text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Manage conditional tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Conditional Tags pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Creating and editing conditional tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Importing conditional tags and expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Deleting conditional tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
List Conditional tags in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Apply conditional tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Applying conditional tags to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Applying conditional tags at book level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Applying conditional tags in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Removing conditional tags from text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Removing all conditional tags from text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Identifying the state of conditionalized text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Copying conditions across text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Show or hide conditional text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Show / Hide Conditional Text dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Show / hide conditional text using conditional tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Show / hide conditional text using conditional expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Finalizing conditional documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Insert cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Cross-Reference dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Insert cross-references in documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Manage cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Editing cross-references in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Deleting cross-references in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Managing cross-reference formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Updating cross-references in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Managing unresolved cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xx

Text insets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Insert text insets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
To import a text into a document: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Flow to import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Formatting of Imported Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Updating of Imported Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Manage text insets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Viewing and editing inset properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Deleting text insets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Updating text insets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Fixing unresolved text insets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Insert a cross-reference to a paragraph in a text inset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Insert variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
To insert a variable in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
How variables display in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Inserting variables into structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Manage variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Creating user variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Editing user and system variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Deleting variables in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Converting variables to text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Importing variables from one document to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Add variables to headers and footers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Running H/F variables in FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Using markers to display text in a running header or footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Creating a dictionary-style header or footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Review and collaboration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Text edit tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Tracked and untracked text edits: Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Set scope for tracking text edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Set color preferences for tracking text edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Display Track Text Edits toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Turn text edit tracking on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Manage track text edits in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Preview a document with track text edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Saving and publishing a document with track text edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Saving a document with tracked text edits as XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Change bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Apply change bars automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Apply change bars manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Create and apply change bar character format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Remove change bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Clear all change bars in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
xxi

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Remove specific change bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
PDF review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Send a review PDF through email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Create a ubiquitous PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Set up shared review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Import PDF comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Importing comments from PDF after changing the source document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Conditions for importing PDF comments in edited documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Types of comments supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Placement of comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Import comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Create packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Dropbox integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Configure Dropbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Add files to Dropbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Share Dropbox location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Open and save files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Document comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
About compare documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Types of items compared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Compare two versions of a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Compare documents that contain conditional tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Compare documents that contain conditional tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Word and character count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
FAQ & troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Structured authoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
SGML, XML, and XHTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
DITA and DocBook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
XML View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Author View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
WYSIWYG View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Switch between the views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Structured authoring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Working with the Structure View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Expand or collapse structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
View element boundaries in the document window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Expand and collapse elements in document window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Show and hide attributes for new elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
Change the scope of elements available in a structured document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Structure View pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Elements catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Working with elements in structured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xxii

Valid contents for elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Two classes of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Attributes for elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Import element definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Insert elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Add text in a structured document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Edit elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Hierarchical element insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Select and edit text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Remove elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Assign attribute values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Types of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Copy attribute values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Find and edit elements and attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Find and correct errors in document structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Quick Element Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Using the Quick Element Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Create a Quick Element Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Error console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Author content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Create XML documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
Create a blank XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Create an XML based on a DTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Create an XML based on a structured application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Save an XML document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Open an XML document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Working with elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Elements catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Manage elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Banner text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Element boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
Create output with banner text and element boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Working with attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Set attribute values for elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
View the attributes of an element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Copy the attribute values from one element to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Create equations using the Equations pod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Create an inline equation using an element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Create a display equation using an element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Create an equation in an anchored frame element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Create equations using MathML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Create and insert a MathML equation into a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Edit a MathML equation in a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Configure the MathFlow settings in FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Configure the installation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

xxiii

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Format a MathML equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Configure the MathFlow editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Sample DITA MathML structured app . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Change text direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Smart paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Smart paste content in a DITA file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
Add smart paste XSL for a custom XML application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Conditional text in XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
OLE object support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
Insert an OLE object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Whitespace handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
White-space normalization standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
Cross-references in XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
Round trip table properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Round trip equations and anchored frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
Filter by attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Apply filtering attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Set attribute values for elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Create filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Create a filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Guidelines for creating filter rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Manage filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Edit filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Delete filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
Import filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Set attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Apply a filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
Complex Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
XPath queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
XPath toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Auto-Suggest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
XSL Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
Switch to XALAN processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Create transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
Edit transformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
Application-specific transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
Transform multiple files using Advanced Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
Getting started with structured applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
Structured templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Content analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
Element rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
XML schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xxiv

Create an EDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Analyze requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
Choose an EDD strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Build the proposal EDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
Define child elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Add formatting to the EDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Test the EDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Create a DTD from an EDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
Build a structured application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Create a DTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Create a structured template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Configure the structured application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
Copy the application files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Build structure files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
Test XML roundtripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
Configuration file editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
XML with Cascading Style Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Import CSS element styles into an EDD file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
Export CSS for a FrameMaker XML file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
XML with schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
Schema workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Changes to the structure application for schema support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
Generate an element catalog (EDD) from a schema . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
View or edit XML namespaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Convert unstructured documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Conversion workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Conversion rule examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
Simplified XML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
Simplified XML user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
Use the Simplified XML view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
Working with objects in Simplified XML view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Work with ordered and unordered list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
Work with tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Work with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Work with MathML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Work with Definition List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Work with code block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Use Paste and Smart Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700
Open and save XML files in the Simplified XML view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Customize the Simplified XML authoring environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Customize the Simplified XML view form fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
Customize the Simplified XML view template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
Structured authoring using DITA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
Why DITA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Content reuse and modularity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
xxv

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Multichannel publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Ease of authoring and publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Minimalism in content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Reduced localization costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Challenges in implementing DITA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
DITA topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Create a DITA topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
Add links to related content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
DITA Link dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
Create a DITA link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 712
DITA maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
Create a DITA map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714
Insert topicref elements in a DITA map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
Display DITA map content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Show or hide the preview of topicref elements content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
Open all topics referenced in a DITA map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Save a DITA map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
DITA referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Set up reference content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719
Using keyspaces to manage DITA key references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720
Update DITA references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722
Find References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
Bookmaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723
DITAval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Set up DITA topics to use DITAval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Applying condition attributes to elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
Creating a ditaval file to create conditional output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726
Generate conditional output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
Content references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
Set up a topic to use conrefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
DITA conref dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
To open the DITA conref dialog: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
Use the DITA Conref dialog to: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Working with conrefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730
Create a conref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731
Creating a conref to a range of elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732
Updating conrefs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
Set up topics to use cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 733
DITA Cross-Reference dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Use the DITA Cross-Reference dialog to: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734
Create a cross-reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736
Relationship tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
Create a relationship table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Sample relationship table workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xxvi

Save as PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Multi-channel publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
DITA Open Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 742
Generate output using DITA OT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
Change the output type list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
Use a different DITA-OT package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745
DITA specialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 747
Print and publish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
PDF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Save as PDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
Configure PDF settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Update general settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751
Customize PDF bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
Tagged PDF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
Add links from other documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
Import PDF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
Optimize files created in previous versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
Optimization options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
PDF conversion guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
Multichannel publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 758
Generate output using the default publish settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
Configure publish settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
Style mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764
Outputs settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
Use the RoboHelp settings (isf) file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781
HTML page templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Create an HTML page template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Define a mini TOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
Define a breadcrumb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785
Define a header and footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Define the body content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Sample HTML page template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Microsoft HTML Help distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
Register ActiveX controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Generate dynamic content output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Tag content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Create a dynamic content filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Use a dynamic content filter in the output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Format TOC for publish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Indent TOC items in a book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Specify number of TOC items in a DITA map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793
Print output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Prepare color documents for output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Prepare color documents for commercial printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
xxvii

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Print color separations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
Knock out and overprint colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Print negative and mirror images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
Trap objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
Processing color documents using OPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
Print to Linotronic typesetters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
Print documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799
Print to a desktop printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
Print options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800
Create PostScript files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
Content Management Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Adobe Experience Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Set up the AEM connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Create a CRX folder and upload files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
Other operations on the folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Working with files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Check out a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
Check in a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806
Cancel Check-out of a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Other operations on a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Searching in the AEM repository . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
Repository search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Advanced search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
Associate XMP Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Manage AEM preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Documentum, SharePoint, and DITAExchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Configure the connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Set default file versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Setup and configure the Documentum connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Add the FrameMaker types and formats on the Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
Set up sample Adobe FrameMaker DITA Applications for Documentum Server . . . . . 815
Connect to the content management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Using Repository Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815
Upload files and folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Upload files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816
Upload folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Manage resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Manage Documentum cabinets, folders, and files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818
Check out files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820
Check in files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Manage files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Search files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
Basic search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822
Advanced search in SharePoint or DITAExchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
Filter files by attributes in DITAExchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823
ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xxviii

Advanced search in Documentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Add custom CMS attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826
Add a custom property for SharePoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828
Add a custom property for Documentum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
WebDAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Advantages of using Browse URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Using the Browse URL workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
Save a WebDAV server connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831
Setting preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Using HTTP paths to open files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Add, open, and save documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832
Associate a template with a folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
Scripting in FrameMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
What is scripting? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Why use scripting? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Getting started with scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Run scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835
Manage scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836
Manage favorite scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837
Manage autorun scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Manage registered (notification) scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838
Other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Using ExtendScript Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840
Keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
About keyboard shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Conventions and function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841
Navigating through documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
Book commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844
Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Save and Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Cancel and Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846
Navigation within a document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Document redisplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847
Hypertext documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Typing in dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848
Window manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850
Display and activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 850

xxix

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Navigation within dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Command buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851
Radio buttons and checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Pop-up menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Scroll lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Custom menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852
Document design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Master and reference pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Page layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Import formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Side-head area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
Text flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Document utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Spelling Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854
Thesaurus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Document comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855
Document reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
HTML and PDF export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Reference Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856
Pen patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857
Fill patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Line widths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Line styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858
Adding color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Color selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Color views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
Editing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Object selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Object manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Object movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Object alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861
Object rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862
Graphic frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Editing text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Element menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864
Entering special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Equations pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Symbols page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867
Operators page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870
Large page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
Delimiters page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874
Relations page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 876
Calculus page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877
Matrices page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xxx

Functions page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879
Positioning pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881
Navigating in an equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Filter By Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Find and change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887
Hierarchical element insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Markers and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Marker insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Variable insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
Menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
Context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
File menu (document window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
File menu (book window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
Edit menu (document window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891
Edit menu (book window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
Add menu (book window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893
Element menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
Format menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
View menu (document window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897
View menu (book window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
Special menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
Graphics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
Table menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
StructureTools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 904
DITA menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
Window menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Screen modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Selection in tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907
Navigating through tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908
Tab characters in cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Row and column manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Row and column replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
Vertical alignment in cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
Column width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
Table Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
Table formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
Insertion point movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911
Insertion point placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Text selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Text editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Asian text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
Text deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

xxxi

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Text formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
Character and Paragraph Designers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
Paragraph formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
Character formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Object styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Track Text Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919
Conditional text display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Conditional text window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Condition tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Working with structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921
Other useful shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923
Character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Windows character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924
Standard character set for special hyphens, spaces, returns, and undisplayed characters . .
924
Standard character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
Symbol and ZapfDingbats character sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936
Unsupported keyboard shortcuts for the Symbol and Dingbats character set in
FrameMaker 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941
Support for FrameMaker 7.x character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946
Keyboard shortcut support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Using key sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947
Additional resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Structured authoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
FrameMaker Publishing Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
INI and MIF Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Programming and scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950
Legal notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

xxxii

xxxiii

ADOBE FRAMEMAKER (2015 RELEASE)

Getting started

Getting started
Adobe FrameMaker is a complete content authoring solution with the required product maturity to
support complex authoring environments and publishing needs.
Before you begin working with FrameMaker, take a few moments to read an overview of its capabilities and learn how to install, activate, and register the software. In addition to the information
provided in this guide, you can access instructional videos, plug-ins, templates, user communities,
seminars, tutorials, RSS feeds, and much more online.
To get an overview of FrameMaker, see What is FrameMaker.

What is FrameMaker
If you need a versatile solution that takes care of all your authoring and publishing needs,
FrameMaker is the answer:
•

Whether you want to create a document that enforces a tight structure or whether you want to
take a template-based approach, FrameMaker offers its powerful tools in the most accessible
ways for individuals as well as teams.

•

With the advanced review and collaboration capabilities of FrameMaker, you can seamlessly
integrate and address review comments.

•

FrameMaker lets you effortlessly tie your files to Adobe Experience Manager, Documentum,
SharePoint, or any content management system of your choice.

•

A large set of publishing options enables you to customize and deliver your content to multiple
devices.

1

Getting started

1

FrameMaker is a versatile solution for all your authoring and publishing needs

Author and enrich content
While the nature of some documents calls for structured authoring, you may want to use the
free-flow mode of authoring for other documents. Graphics, tables, and rich-media objects are only
some of the few ways in which you can enrich content. FrameMaker gives you the flexibility to
choose your mode of authoring and also gives you several options to enhance content.
2

Getting started

Manage and collaborate
Speed and accuracy are paramount in keeping your content current as well as relevant. You have
several options to conduct content reviews and ensure smooth collaboration with team members.
Use change bars, enable tracking of text edits, or set up shared PDF reviews depending upon your
need. You can also use FrameMaker to directly access and upload assets to a content management
system.

3

Getting started

1

For details, see Structured authoring.

Publish across multiple channels
The current demands of content publishing requires the support for an ever-growing number of
formats and devices. FrameMaker meets your complex publishing needs in the most easy-to-use and
efficient ways. You can generate PDF, responsive HTML5, WebHelp, or output for Kindle devices,
among other output formats. You can also choose to customize your output by changing styles and
themes, setting templates, enabling encoding, or setting up content search options. Generate a single
output format or multiple formats at one go.

For details, see Multichannel publishing.

Supported software
FrameMaker supports the following software in its workflows:
4

Getting started
•

Microsoft Word Office 365 (only document downloaded from Office 365), 2013, or 2010

•

Adobe Acrobat Pro DC (2015 release) or XI

•

Adobe Captivate 9, 8, or 7

•

EMC Documentum 6.7

•

Microsoft® SharePoint 2013 or 2010

•

Adobe Experience Manager 6.1 or 5.5

Authoring modes
FrameMaker offers the following authoring modes:
•

FrameMaker mode

•

Structured FrameMaker mode

•

FrameMaker XML Author mode

Depending on whether you take the structured or unstructured approach to content authoring, you
can choose an appropriate FrameMaker mode for your content.

FrameMaker mode
The FrameMaker mode is ideal for authoring content that need not be tied to a rigid structure. The
unstructured style of authoring relies on a template to define the presentation of content. Font, paragraph, table, and other formats are often based on style guides, and content writing rules specified
by editors. You, as an author, decide the content flow and formatting. For example, depending on
the nature of content, you may include headings followed either by paragraphs or by graphics. This
means that in an unstructured authoring workflow, you create relatively free-flow documents that
are largely style-based.
A typical workflow for unstructured authoring in FrameMaker comprises the following tasks:
•

Create single documents or include multiple documents in a book.

•

Specify how content is presented by defining font, paragraph, and table formats among others.

•

Create templates, with appropriate styles, that can be shared with multiple authors.

•

Use the Document window to author in this free-form environment. Type Enter to create a
new paragraph or place the insertion point at the required location before you insert objects
like images and tables.

•

Author in any of the supported formats:

5

Getting started

1

–

unstructured documents (.fm)

–

Maker Interchange Format documents (.mif)

–

books (.book)

NOTE: You cannot use the FrameMaker mode to open structured documents.

Structured FrameMaker mode
Use the Structured FrameMaker mode for documents that need to adhere to a structure. The structure is defined in terms of the elements that are available to the document as well as the valid location
of these elements in the structure.
Every part of a document, for example, a paragraph, a section, a topic, or a table, is expressed as an
element. When you create a structured document, you need to ensure that every element is present
at a structurally valid location. Structured authoring ensures consistency of structure across similar
pieces of content.
Following are some examples of structural rules:
•

A bulleted list must contain at least three items

•

A heading must be followed by a paragraph.

•

A table must have a heading row.

•

A graphic must have a caption.

A typical workflow for structured authoring in FrameMaker comprises the following tasks:
6

Getting started
•

Create individual structured documents or include multiple documents in a DITAmap or a
book.

•

Use the existing structured samples or create a custom structure based on EDDs or DTDs.

•

Include the right elements to define the flow of content. Some elements also include formatting
information that you can use to specify styles.

•

The underlying structure ensures consistency across content in a multi-author environment.

•

Use the Elements catalog or keyboard shortcuts to insert new elements for text, images, tables,
and other objects.

•

Use the Structure view to navigate through your document and also move elements around.
The Structure view also indicates the validity of your document against the underlying structure.

•

Author in any of the supported formats:
–

structured documents (.fm)

–

XML documents (.xml)

–

books (.book)

NOTE: You can also choose to work with unstructured documents in the Structured mode. All features

of the FrameMaker mode are available in the Structured mode.

7

Getting started

1

FrameMaker XML Author mode
The FrameMaker XML Author mode is specifically built for those authoring exclusively in XML.
The underlying structure ensures consistency across content in a multi-author environment
A typical workflow for authoring in the FrameMaker XML Author mode comprises the following
tasks:
•

Create individual structured documents or include multiple documents in a DITA map or a
book.

•

Use the existing structured samples or create a custom structure based on DTDs.

•

Include the right elements to define the flow of content.

•

Use the Elements catalog or keyboard shortcuts to insert new elements for text, images, tables
and other objects.

•

Use the Structure view to navigate through your document and also move elements around.
The Structure view also indicates the validity of your document against the underlying structure.

•

Author in any of the supported formats:
–

XML documents (.xml)

–

books (.book)

NOTE: You cannot open unstructured documents in the FrameMaker XML Author mode. This mode

also does not include the multichannel publishing feature.

8

Getting started
FrameMaker XML Author is also available as a separate standalone product.

Choose an authoring mode
The first time you launch FrameMaker, you are prompted to choose from the following modes:
•

FrameMaker

•

Structured FrameMaker

•

FrameMaker XML Author

If you have already opened FrameMaker in one of the modes, you can change the mode from the
Preferences dialog:
1)

Open the Preferences dialog (Edit > Preferences).

2)

In the Preferences dialog, go to Global > General tab.

3)

In the Product Interface drop-down list, choose the FrameMaker mode and click OK.

You are prompted to restart FrameMaker for the changes to take effect.
The FrameMaker user interface provides for a seamless transition between unstructured and structured authoring. The menu options and other user interface elements are consistent between both
the modes. The options, however, are specific to the mode in which you are authoring.

What’s new in Adobe FrameMaker 2015
Adobe FrameMaker 2015 ships with a number of enhancements.

Structured authoring and XML Enhancements

Simplified XML
FrameMaker now makes it easier for the subject matter experts and casual authors to create valid
XML documents without the need to know the underlying XML structure. DITA 1.3 and DITA 1.2
structured applications have been enhanced to support the new Simplified XML authoring environment. The new simplified authoring interface provides a form-like easy-to-fill authoring environment.
See the video, Simplified XML authoring.

9

Getting started

1

While authoring, you can use the customized Quick Elements Toolbar to easily insert the most
commonly used objects, such as numbered list, image, or a section in your document.
See the video, Enhanced Quick Element toolbar.
Out-of-the-box FrameMaker supports DITA 1.3 and DITA 1.2 topics, however, you can also design
your own structured applications to use the Simplified XML authoring environment. You can also
customize the appearance of the form fields by updating the associated template.
For more information, see Simplified XML.
See the video, Customized environments for simplified XMLauthoring.
DITA 1.3 support
FrameMaker now provides support for DITA 1.3. This means that now you can create troubleshooting DITA topics. You also get a customized QET for all DITA 1.3 topics in WYSIWYG view.
For more information, see Customization.
See the video, DITA 1.3 Support.
Structure view enhancements
Working with the Structure View is now more intuitive. Enhancements to the way elements are
accessed and displayed makes navigating through your document much easier.
In addition to the triangle insertion point displayed in the Structure View, the element bubble
containing the insertion point in your document is now highlighted. If your insertion point is inside
an element whose parent is collapsed in the Structure View, the parent element is highlighted to indicate the top level location of your insertion point.
The right-click context menu includes the option to locate your current location in the Structure
View. You can also use the Ctrl+Shift+L keystroke to locate your element in the Structure View.
When dragging and dropping elements across the Structure View, the destination pointer changes
color based on whether the destination is structurally valid or not. You can, however, still choose to
place an element at a location that is structurally invalid. If the target location element is collapsed,
hover the mouse over the element to expand the target element.
You can choose to expand and collapse all sibling elements or all child elements in the Structure
View. The right-click menu for an element includes an item for expanding and collapsing elements.
When scrolling through your document using the mouse or the scroll bars, FrameMaker also scrolls
through the contents in the Structure View. The document view and the Structure View are therefore
always synchronized. This synchronization is also maintained when you scroll through the Structure
View. This feature is turned off by default. You can choose to activate the synchronization from the
FrameMaker Preferences dialog.
For more information, see Working with the Structure View.
10

Getting started
See the video, Enhanced Structure View.
MathML object enhancements
Support for DITA 1.3 documents
You can now insert MathML equations in DITA 1.3 document types (topic, task, concept, reference,
and troubleshooting). Quick Element Toolbar in Simplified XML view for DITA 1.3 documents has
been enhanced to include the MathML container button that allows you to insert MathML equations.
Saving PDF documents with MathML equations
When saving files as PDF documents, MathML objects are now saved with the EPS facet instead of
PNG. In addition to making the object text searchable, the EPS facet enhances the clarity of the
MathML object.
MathML object styles
You can now apply any of the object styles available in your template, to a MathML object. The
compose DPI property is not supported for MathML objects. When you open previous versions of
FrameMaker files the compose DPI property is not honored.
Support for inline MathML equations
By default, when you insert a MathML equation in a document, the equation is placed on the next
line after the current insertion point. You can use the inline property to place the MathML equation
inline with the paragraph text.
The Ambient property allows you to specify that the following MathML styles will be inherited from
the styles of the enclosing text:
•

Font color, size, and family

•

Background color

You can update the inline and ambient properties of a MathML equation that is included from
within the object properties dialog. Alternatively, you edit or create an object style with these properties are already set and then apply this object style to a MathML equation.
For more information, see Format a MathML equation.
See the video, Improved support for inline MathML Equations.

11

Getting started

1

EDD enhancements
Faster and seamless EDD customization
The modular nature of the EDD structure makes updating it a time consuming process. The
multi-step process involves identifying modular files, running book updates for modular EDDs as
well as book updates for all EDDs among other tasks. This multi-step process could take well over
30 hours. FrameMaker now offers a single menu item for updating an EDD and it takes less than 10
minutes for the entire process to complete. Select DITA > Update EDD to update your EDD in a
single step.
Using the Image align attribute
If the value for the align attribute is not defined in the document or not set through the Attribute
editor, then FrameMaker checks for default value defined in the EDD. If a default value is not defined
in the EDD, the image is center aligned in the document.
Ditaval support in DITA-OT publishing
When generating output using the DITA Open Tool kit, you can specify conditional filtering of
content using attribute-value pairs in a ditaval file. While the location of the ditaval file could be
specified in ditafm.ini, you can now select your ditaval file from the Generate DITA-OT Output
dialog
For more information, see Generate output using DITA OT.
Support for DITA Open Toolkit 2.1
Support for DITA Open Toolkit (DITA-OT) has been upgraded from 1.8 to 2.1 library.
For more information, see DITA Open Toolkit.
Preview child map in DITA maps
If a DITA map includes references to child maps, the Show and Hide options in the DITA map will
show or hide the topics referenced in the child maps.
For more information, see Display DITA map content.

Right-to-left language support
FrameMaker now supports right-to-left (RTL) language scripts such as Hebrew, Arabic, and Farsi.
You can author the entire document in the RTL script of your choice or you can author a document
in both RTL and LTR scripts simultaneously. For example, in an LTR document, you can include
selected paragraphs or tables that are authored in an RTL script. You can also author a document
containing both RTL and LTR content.

12

Getting started
Bi-directional content authoring
FrameMaker provides out-of-the-box document direction support for both unstructured documents (see Set the direction of a document) and DITA topics (see Change text direction). However,
for structured documents based on other structured applications, the application developer will
need to define the dir property in the EDD. For details, see the Structured applications reference
guide.
You can also choose to author multi-directional documents. This means that you can author a document in a specific direction that includes parts authored in the other direction. For example, you can
author a document in a LTR script such as English that includes paragraphs (see Paragraph
Designer) and tables (see Change the direction of text in table) authored in RTL scripts such as
Arabic, Hebrew, or Farsi.
You can import Word documents into FrameMaker that contain content that is either LTR or RTL
(see Import Microsoft Word files). You can also copy and paste such text to and from FrameMaker
documents.
For more information, see Document direction.
See the video, Bi-directional language authoring.
Bi-directional content publishing
You can save your bi-directional documents to PDF. You can use FrameMaker’s multi-device
publishing feature to generate bi-directional output.
For more information, see Create a document.
See the video, Bi-directional Content Publishing.
Bi-directional content flipping
You can also flip objects, such as images, in a document.
See the video, Bi-directional content flipping.

Authoring and productivity enhancements

Revamped Word import
The improved Word import feature in FrameMaker allows you to import a Word document into an
existing or new FrameMaker document. When you import the document, you are provided with a

13

Getting started

1

number of options that allow you to choose the formatting of the destination content based on the
styles and formats available in the Word document as well as FrameMaker document.
For more information, see Import Microsoft Word files.
See the video, More powerful Word Import.
Create mini TOCs for documents
Now make your long documents easy to read and navigate by adding a mini TOC. Earlier,
FrameMaker allowed you to add a TOC at the book level, but now you can add a mini TOC in each
document within your book. The style of your mini TOC can also be customized to match your
document's look and feel. You can choose to updated the mini TOC from within the document itself
or update all documents containing the mini TOC at the book level.
For more information, see Generate a miniature table of contents.
See the video, Mini TOC.
Improved visual conditional indicators
Selecting any content, such as image, table, graphic, or anchored frame now reveals the conditional
tags applied on it. Using the visual indicators, you can ensure consistency while applying the conditional tags.

See the video, Enhanced visual conditional indicators.
Table Enhancements
Conditionalize table columns
Apply conditional tags to individual columns in any of your tables. The column reflects the formatting specified in the conditional tag. The columns are either displayed or hidden based on the
settings you save from the Show/Hide Conditional Text dialog. The conditional tag state for a
column overrides any conditional tags that are applied to the text in the individual cells in the
column.
For more information, see Conditional text.
See the video, Conditionaltablecolumns.
Table usability enhancements
Use one of the multiple table formats available to you when creating a new table. You can choose to
use the new formats for existing tables, from the Table Designer or the Table Catalog. Use the Table
Designer to modify a table design as required.

14

Getting started
For more information, see Insert a table.
See the video, Improved usability in tables.
Navigate through the cells of a table using either the Tab key or the arrow keys on your keyboard.
Pressing Tab when you are in the last cell of the table, creates a new row at the end of the table.
If you are working in Structured FrameMaker's Author View or FrameMaker XML Author's
WYSIWYG or Author View, you can easily rotate graphic and table text by using the context or main
menu. Also, resizing table column function is now available in the context and main menus’.
For more information, see Rows and columns.
You may need to reorder the rows and columns in your table. Select the row or column you want to
move and hold the Shift key down before you drop the row or column to the desired location. You
can select multiple rows and columns for reordering.
For more information, see Copy, move, or reorder rows or columns.
Auto insert table continuation variables
Add continuation variables to a table using the Add Variables option from the right-click menu.
Apply the variables you created to the current table, to all tables, or to all tables of a certain format.
For more information, see Insert a table.
See the video, Automatic insertion of table continuationvariables.
Table cell shading with solid fill
In previous releases, the color tint property of a table, would cause the color to be displayed as a granular pattern. The functionality now changes the color to a shade based on the percentage of the tint.
See the video, More out-of-the-box table styles.
Conditional text at book level
You can choose to apply conditional tags to all documents in your book at the same time instead of
working with each file individually. Select your book file and click View > Show/Hide Conditional
Text to select the conditions you want to apply to the files in your book. The Show/Hide Conditional
Text dialog displays a consolidated list of all the conditional tags present in the files of the book. Only
those expressions that are present in the default document, which is the first file in your book, are
listed in the Show/Hide Conditional Text dialog.
For more information, see Applying conditional tags at book level.
See the video, Conditional text at book level.

15

Getting started

1

UI Enhancements
Location of modal pods
FrameMaker now remembers the location of the modal pods in the application.
Activate opened pods
If a modeless pod is currently opened and a user opens the pod again (using the menu or
shortcut keys), the pod is highlighted as an indicator to the user.

Resizable dialogs
The following modal and client dialogs can be resized:
•

Set Up Table of Contents (Special > Table of Contents > Standalone TOC)

•

Set Up Mini Table of Contents (Special > Table of Contents > Create Mini TOC).

•

Set Up Standard Index dialog (Special > Standard Index).

•

Set Up Author Index dialog (Special > Index Of > Authors).

•

Set Up Subject Index dialog (Special > Index Of > Subjects).

•

Set Up Index Of Markers dialog (Special > Index Of > Markers).

•

Set Up Index Of References dialog (Special > Index Of > References).

•

DITA Conref dialog (DITA > Insert Conref)

•

DITA Cross-Reference dialog (Special > Cross-Reference)

•

DITA Link dialog

The following modeless dialogs can be resized:

16

Getting started
•

Show / Hide Conditional Text dialog

•

Cross-Reference dialog

Smart filter
In the following dialogs, you can use the Smart filter feature to search for tag names:
•

Character Designer

•

Paragraph Designer

•

Table Designer

•

Object Designer

See the video, Smart filters in pods.
Redesigned pods
The following pods have been redesigned to improved usability:

17

Getting started

1

Add / Edit Condition Tag

Add / Edit Variable

Color definition dialog updates
The following updates have been made to the Color Definitions dialog:
•

18

The color sliders now function on the 0-255 RGB range

Getting started
•

The New and Current views are now within the same color box to allow users to easily
compare the two.

•

You can now specify a Hex color code

Pods do not gray out on resize
If pods are docked at the bottom of the screen and a user reduces the size of the FrameMaker
window, the pods are grayed out only if the size of the window is reduced to an extent that
prevents functioning of the pod.
Table color shading
In previous releases, the color tint property of a table, would cause the color to be displayed as
a granular pattern. The functionality now changes the color to a shade based on the percentage
of the tint.
Drag and drop to open files
You can now drag-and-drop files from the Windows Explorer to empty UI areas, toolbars,
menu bars, pods, or document window to open them.
Conditional tag pod State button
Now when you apply a condition to text in a document, the State checkbox operates as a toggle.
This implies that if you apply a condition to text, you need to check the State checkbox. To
remove a condition from text, you need to uncheck the State checkbox.
The intermediate state is read-only. This implies that if you select text where the current condition is partially applied, the checkbox displays with the intermediate state.

19

Getting started

1

See the video, Enhanced pod support.
See the video, Enhanced UI.
Package related files into a zip file
You can package a FrameMaker book, DITA map, .xml, .mif, or .fm file with all its related files into
a zip file for distribution or backup. When you choose to create a package with a book or DITA map
in focus, FrameMaker automatically picks up the related files, such as chapter files, images, text
insets, conrefs, crossrefs, to a .zip file.
For details, see Create packages.
FrameMaker connector enhancements
DITA Exchange - FrameMaker connector
In addition to the existing AEM, Documentum, and SharePoint connectors, FrameMaker now also
provides support for the DITA Exchange connector.
Dita Exchange simplifies the way organizations create, manage, deliver and re-use important
content through structured content management solutions built to run on the SharePoint platform.
By helping companies produce and maintain important information quickly and following compliance guidelines, employees spend less time keeping up with regulations and more time reaching
company goals. For more information about DITA Exchange visit the official website at http://ditaexchange.com/.
FM-AEM connector enhancements
The FrameMaker - AEM connector includes the following enhancements:
User area
The user area will be used to store lock token information instead of user preferences.
The previous preference location: home/groups/e/everyone/preferences
The new location: home/users
NOTE: Since the way token information is stored is changed, all users should move simultaneously

to the new connector. Failing to do this may lead to inconsistent behavior across file operations

20

Getting started
Missing files
The missing file(s) will be displayed in FrameMaker Show Dependents and the Book dialog
boxes.
Data loss during check-in
Previously, a user would lose data if the AEM server went down during a check-in operation.
Now the check-in procedure is rolled back and the file remains checked out on the local drive.
Local download folder name
FrameMaker now always creates the local download folder in lower case, irrespective of the
connection title provided in the Connection manager dialog.
NOTE: If a local folder with name in capital letters is already present, a file will get checked-out

and downloaded in this folder itself but check-in will fail. In this case, the local folder in upper
case should be renamed to lower case before migrating to the new connector.

Publishing enhancements
XSLT enhancements
FrameMaker now uses SAXON as the default XSLT processor. If your application uses
XALAN-specific constructs, you can still switch the XSLT process to XALAN by making the
required changes in your structured application. Your structured application can now be configured
to used different processors for handling pre-processing, post-processing, and smart pasting operations.
For more information, see XSL Transformation.
Enable browse sequences in Microsoft HTML output (CHM)
FrameMaker now has an option to enable browse sequences in Microsoft HTML output. The browse
sequences are created automatically based on the TOC and displayed in the CHM output, when this
option is enabled in the publish settings for Microsoft HTML layout.
Layout icons optimized for high resolution Retina display
The icons in Responsive HTML5 layouts have now been optimized for high resolution Retina
display. The icons in Azure and Charcoal gray layouts will appear sharp and clear on high resolution
devices.
Farsi publishing support
FrameMaker now also supports Farsi output language for Responsive HTML5, Mobile App,
WebHelp, ePub, Kindle, and Microsoft HTML Help layouts. This means that you can now choose
21

Getting started

1

these language settings for the UI strings and language-related UI elements in the preview and generated output.
Publishing to Digital Publishing Solution
FrameMaker’s multi-channel publishing feature now provides an option to publish your documents
to the Adobe Digital Publishing Solution (DPS). For details about Digital Publishing Solution, see
http://www.adobe.com/in/products/digital-publishing-solution.html.
Now generate Adobe DPS output for your FrameMaker documentation and upload the generated
articles to Adobe DPS. Use your Adobe account to sign into the Adobe Digital Publishing Solution
and create your DPS projects. Ensure that you are using FrameMaker on the same Adobe account.
In the Publish Settings dialog, select your Adobe account and the DPS project. When your run the
publish procedure, the articles are generated in your output folder and uploaded to the selected
project in your DPS account.
Dynamic Content Filters
Create dynamic filters in your Responsive HTML5 output to empower your users to find the relevant
content faster.
Leverage FrameMaker’s existing conditional tags and expressions to create filters that allows your
end users to dynamically filter the Responsive HTML5 output. The feature also enables you to easily
single-source your content by applying tags and expressions on the appropriate content.
For more information, see Generate dynamic content output.
Mobile app output support
Ensure wider distribution and consumption of content with a simplified mobile app generation
workflow and native integration with Adobe PhoneGap Build. Easily publish and then distribute
your content as an installable app on major mobile platforms, including iOS, Android, and
Windows.
Also use the generated QR code or PhoneGap URL to share your apps with your users.
For more information, see Outputs settings.
New Responsive HTML5 layouts
Now use the highly customizable Responsive HTML5 layouts to deliver an amazing content
consumption experience. Configure search, and show context and breadcrumbs in the results. Easily
show or hide widgets, such as glossary and TOC. Convert the layout to right-to-left languages just
by changing one property.

22

Getting started
Provide users personalized experiences by customizing the function bar, side bar, TOC, and
dynamic content filter for different devices: desktop, mobile, and tablet. You can also customize the
media queries for mobile and tablet devices.
Support for XML sitemap in the Responsive HTML5 output
A sitemap helps search engines to index your web pages and make your website SEO-friendly.
FrameMaker now gives you an option to create the XML sitemap file for your Responsive HTML5
outputs. In the absence of this feature, you would either use a third-party tool to create a sitemap or
manually create one.
The sitemap generation process is extremely seamless as you need to simply select an option in the
Responsive HTML5 output settings to generate the sitemap for your book or ditamap.The sitemap
contains the references of your web pages, the base URL of your website where you would host the
published output, and the frequency at which you intend to update your pages. As this is an XML
file based on the standardized XML sitemap protocol, you can easily make changes to the sitemap
file as and when needed.
For more information, see Outputs settings.
Enhanced search results in HTML5 layouts
Provide better context about search results to end users by showing more details. Configure the
search results to appear on the sidebar or topic panes, and show breadcrumbs and topic descriptions.
By default, the first few sentences of the topic are shown as description of the search results. Now you
can easily customize the description to provide more relevant details in the search results.
For more information, see Customize layout.
Out-of-the-box support for social widgets
Generate Responsive HTML5 and mobile output that is easily shareable on Facebook and Twitter
with out-of-the-box support for social widgets provided in the new HTML5 layout.
Maintain TOC state in Responsive HTML5 output
Work more conveniently by maintaining the TOC state in the Responsive HTML5 output. Expand
and collapse the chapters and topics in a book while still maintaining the state of the structure. Also,
expand and collapse the chapters and topics across multiple books.
Embed custom fonts in EPUB output
Embed custom fonts in your EPUB output and ensure that your users see high-quality typography
exactly as you intended, whether or not they have the font installed on their device.

23

Getting started

1

This feature is especially useful if you are using fonts that may not be readily available to your end
users.
For more information, see Outputs settings.
SVG Support in HTML5 output
Let your end users see top quality images regardless of the screen size and resolution of the device
on which they are being viewed. This because FrameMaker now embeds the entire SVG code in the
final Responsive HTML5 output.
HTML page templates
You can now customize your HTML outputs to include the following features:
•

Mini-TOC

•

Breadcrumb trail

•

Headers and footers

For more information, see Create an HTML page template.
Use and customize the skins for WebHelp output
Give your WebHelp content a new look by choosing from a wide variety of skins from the Web-Help
gallery.
And a powerful, yet easy-to-use WebHelp skin editor lets you customize not only your content, but
also the appearance of buttons, labels, fonts, background color, search boxes, and most components
of your WebHelp output.

Installation and registration
Follow these instructions to get up and running with FrameMaker on your computer.

System requirements
Before installing FrameMaker, make sure that you have the required hardware and software:

24

•

Intel Pentium 4 or faster processor

•

Microsoft Windows 10, 8.1 or 7

•

1GB of RAM (2GB recommended)

Getting started
•

3 GB of available hard-disk space for installation; additional free space required during installation (cannot install on a volume that uses a case-sensitive file system or on removable flash
storage devices)

•

DVD-ROM drive

•

1024x768 screen resolution (1280x800 recommended) with 16-bit video card

•

This software does not operate without activation. A broadband Internet connection and registration are required for software activation, validation of subscriptions, and access to Online
Services.
NOTE: Phone activation is not available.

Available in languages
FrameMaker is available in the following languages:
•

Deutsch

•

English

•

Français

•

Japanese

Install FrameMaker
To install FrameMaker:
1)

Close any Adobe applications open on your computer.

2)

Insert the installation disc into your disk drive, and follow the on-screen instructions.

During the installation process, your Adobe software contacts an Adobe server to complete the
license activation process. No personal data is transmitted. For more information on product activation, visit the Adobe website at www.adobe.com/go/activation
NOTE: You can have more than one version of FrameMaker installed on your computer.The default

FrameMaker installation path on a Windows system is: C:\Program Files (x86)\Adobe\AdobeFrameMaker2015. In this guide, the default FrameMaker installation location is referred to as .

25

Getting started

1

Register
Register your product to receive complimentary installation support, notifications of updates, and
other services.
1)

To register, follow the onscreen instructions in the Registration dialog box, which appears
when you first start the software.

TIP:If you postpone registration, you can register at any time by choosing Help > Registration.

General resources

Resource

26

URL

FrameMaker Help PDF

http://www.adobe.com/go/learn_fm_ug_en

Getting started with FrameMaker

http://www.adobe.com/go/learn_fm_2015_rev_guide_en

Video tutorials

https://helpx.adobe.com/framemaker/video-hub.html

Frequently Asked Questions

http://www.adobe.com/go/learn_fm_faq_en

System Requirements

http://www.adobe.com/go/learn_fm_sys_req_en

FrameMaker forum

https://forums.adobe.com/community/framemaker/

FrameMaker basics

FrameMaker basics
User interface
Welcome screen
FrameMaker displays a Welcome screen based on the current mode.
The Welcome screen provides options for performing a set of commonly required tasks as relevant
to the current mode of FrameMaker.
•

Open recent documents

•

Create new documents, books, CMS connections, and (in structured and XML author modes)
DITA maps, DITA files, and XML files

•

Access FrameMaker templates

•

Access FrameMaker learning resources

•

Access support, product updates, and forums

•

Restore the last session

The Welcome screen, as shown in the following figure, is displayed on launching FrameMaker in
structured and XML author modes.

27

FrameMaker basics

2

Workspaces
A particular arrangement of elements, such as pods that you use frequently while working on documents, is called a workspace. You can dock, stack, minimize, or make these elements free-floating in
your workspace. You can select from several preset workspaces or create one of your own. Once you
have arranged the pods, you can save the workspace settings for use later.
The FrameMaker interface has the following components.

28

•

The Application bar across the top contains a workspace switcher, menus, and other application controls.

•

The document window displays the file you’re working on. Document windows can be tabbed
and, in certain cases, grouped and docked.

•

Pods help you monitor and modify your work. Examples include character, paragraph, and
table designers; and marker, variable, cross-reference pods. You can minimize, group, stack, or
dock pods.

•

The status bar shows text formatting and pagination information for the current document.

FrameMaker basics
Standard workspaces
You can choose from standard workspaces or create custom workspaces and switch between them.
The standard workspaces are designed so that you can quickly switch between workspaces according
to what you want to accomplish. For example, the Review workspace has review toolbars, commonly
used pods, and pods prearranged to help you review a document quickly.
•

Authoring

•

DITA Authoring (available only in Structured FrameMaker)

•

Manage Content

•

Manage Graphics

•

Review

•

Structured Authoring (available only in Structured FrameMaker)

Save a custom workspace
1)

Configure the workspace the way you want it and choose Save Workspace from the workspace
switcher on the Application bar.

2)

Type a name for the workspace and click OK.

FrameMaker remembers the last used workspace across sessions. If you were working in the Review
workspace and you close and relaunch FrameMaker, it loads the Review workspace.
Switch workspaces
1)

Select a workspace from the workspace switcher in the Application bar.
Use the workspace switcher to switch between workspaces designed for your workflow.

29

FrameMaker basics

2

Reset a workspace
By saving the current configuration of pods as a named workspace, you can restore that workspace
even if you move or close a pod. The names of saved workspaces appear in the workspace switcher
in the Application bar.
Select the Reset Workspace option from the workspace switcher in the Application bar.
Rename a custom workspace
1)

Select Manage Workspace from the workspace switcher in the Application bar.

2)

Select the workspace and click Rename.

3)

Type a new name and click OK twice.

Delete a custom workspace
Select Manage Workspace from the workspace switcher in the Application bar, select the workspace,
and then click Delete.

Document window
A document window appears when you open a structured or unstructured FrameMaker document.
The window shows the document text formatted, with graphics and other items in place, and everything laid out in a page design. If more than one document is open, a document window appears for
each one.
The document window is the only window available in the unstructured workspace. In the structured workspace, you can also view element boundaries in the document window.
Tabbed documents
When you open more than one file, the document windows are tabbed. You can open documents as
floating windows by clearing the Open Documents As Tabs option in the Interface Preferences
dialog box.
Documents appear as tabs in the document view

30

FrameMaker basics
However, when you add a generated file, such as a Table of Contents, the generated file appears
minimized in the lower-left corner of your workspace. There are multiple ways in which you can
organize floating and tabbed document windows.
•

To dock a document window in a group of document windows, drag the window into the
group.

•

To rearrange the order of tabbed document windows, drag a window’s tab to a new location in
the group.

•

To undock a document window from a group of windows, drag the window’s tab out of the
group.
NOTE:When you minimize a floating document window, it covers a part of the FrameMaker

status bar. You cannot move the minimized window to a new location.

Pods
Pods are floating panels with an interface designed to simplify your work. FrameMaker offers the
following key pods:
•

Conditional Tags pod

•

Cross-References pod

•

Currently Opened Files pod

•

Markers pod

•

Fonts pod

•

Insets pod

•

Variables pod

•

References pods

•

Currently Opened Files
Pod interface

31

FrameMaker basics

2

A. Select document B. Pod-specific toolbar buttons C. Search pod entries - as you type, FrameMaker
searches through all the columns for matches and keeps displaying them D. Arrow on column
headers indicates sort order E. Pod list area F. Details of each instance include location. You can
customize the location using the Pods Location Criteria dialog box.
Close pods and tab groups
Pods have a button on the right side of the title bar that you can click to close a pod or a tab group
(group of pods).

•

Close: Closes just the pod in focus (the Markers pod, in this case)

•

Close Tab Group: Closes all the pods in the tab group

Also, by double-clicking in the title of a pod, you can minimize or maximize that pod as well as the
whole tab group it is a part of.
Pod list area
The Select pop-up displays a list of all open documents, including books and DITA maps. If you
select All Open Docs, the pod list area displays all the variables from all the open documents. If you
select a specific open document, the pod list area displays variables from the selected document even
when you switch to other open documents. The pod list area continues to display the list of instances
from the selected document.
If you select the Current option, the pod list area displays the list of instances from the selected document. The list area refreshes when you switch between open documents. However, when you switch
between pods, you may need to click the Refresh button.
If you select an open document

32

•

Single-click an instance in the pod to display the corresponding instance in the document. For
example, if you select an image instance from the Insets pod, the corresponding image is also
selected in the document view.

•

Double-click an instance to do the following for each pod:

FrameMaker basics
Conditional Tags pod
Displays the Add/Edit Condition Tag pod for the selected condition.
Cross-references pod
Displays the Cross-Reference pod for editing the selected cross-reference.
Markers pod
Displays the Markers pod so that you can edit the selected marker definition.
Fonts pod
Displays the Replace Font pod for selecting a replacement font.
Insets pod
Displays the Object Properties pod for the selected inset.
Variables pod
Adds the selected variable at the insertion point in the current document.
Reference pod
Displays the results of the search for locations where a particular element is referenced. This
pod is only relevant for DITA documents.
Currently Opened Files
Lets you manage and navigate through large number of open files.
•

Click a column name to sort the data in the list area in ascending or descending order.

Setting pod location criteria
The pod location criteria determine what should be displayed in the pod list area for an instance by
way of identifying its location in the document.
For example, you can define two Paragraph tags that should be displayed as the location identifier
for a marker. FrameMaker searches backwards for the first match of the first Paragraph tag that you
have specified and displays it in the pod. Suppose you specify the first Paragraph tag as Topic_Title
in the Location Criteria dialog box. FrameMaker locates a marker and traverses backwards to display
the first topic title in which the marker occurs. If you specify the second Paragraph tag as Article_Name, FrameMaker displays the exact article name to which the topic belongs.

33

FrameMaker basics

2

Pod location criteria

A. In structured interface, you can specify either the paragraph styles or the element names. In
unstructured FrameMaker, you can only specify paragraph styles. B. Specify the first paragraph style.
C. Specify the second paragraph style.
1)

Choose Edit > Preferences.

2)

Select Pods.

3)

Select Element Name if you want the pod to display the element names in which the instance
is located.

4)

Specify valid element names and click OK.

For example, select Paragraph Style and specify head 2 and head 3 in the Style 1 and Style 2 boxes.
In the Markers pod, for each instance of a marker, the first head 2 and head 3 it occurs under is
displayed in the pod.

34

FrameMaker basics
The Markers pod displays the setting for marker location

A. Marker is selected in the document view B. Paragraph styles that you specify in Pod Location
Criteria C. Markers pod displays the first head3 title and head2 title in which the marker occurs.

Toolbars
You can access all commonly used commands from the following toolbars for use in structured or
unstructured documents. You can display a toolbar from the View > Toolbars menu.
Graphics Toolbar
Provides shortcuts for graphics creation and edits.
Quick Access Bar
Provides commands for opening and saving documents, editing text, graphics, and tables.
35

FrameMaker basics

2

Text Formatting
Provides text formatting commands, such as font styles.
Table Formatting
Provides table editing commands, such as add rows, columns, merge cells, and text alignment
options for table cells.
Paragraph Formatting
Provides commands for formatting paragraphs, such as tab stops, text alignment, spacing, as
well as the paragraph tag list.
Object Alignment
Provides commands to change sequence, alignment, and orientation of objects.
Object Properties
Provides commands to group objects, change layer order, reshape, scale, and snap objects.
Track Text Edits
Provides commands for tracking, accepting, and rejecting text edits.
Quick Element
Provides commands inserting and wrapping common structured document elements.
You also have keyboard shortcuts for all commands accessible through the toolbars and menus. For
a list of all the keyboard shortcuts see Keyboard shortcuts.
Toolbar icons
FrameMaker gives you a choice of sizes and colors for the icons.
Using preferences, you can set up to use any of the following icons for FrameMaker interface:

36

•

Large colored icons

•

Large grayscale icons

•

Regular colored icons

•

Regular grayscale icons

FrameMaker basics
NOTE: Large icons’ size is 26x26pixels and regular icons’ size is 18x18pixels.

The regular grayscale icons in FrameMaker 12 are also of better resolution than the earlier
FrameMaker versions.
FrameMaker 12 icons have better resolution than earlier versions of FrameMaker

See the video: Toolbar Icons.
Set icon preferences
Set your icon preferences to choose colored or greyscale and large or small.
1)

Select Edit > Preferences.

2)

In the Preferences dialog, select Interface and choose the preferences for icons.

3)

Restart FrameMaker for the icon preferences to take effect.

Customize icons
You can also add your own custom icons in FrameMaker.
1)

Locate the toolbar.xml file relevant to your view and mode and open it.

2)

Create and place all the icon files in AppData\Roaming\Adobe\FrameMaker\13\.

3)

Locate the Action element relevant to the icon you want to customize. The Action element
code looks like the following:




4)

Add the base name of the icon in the base attribute of images element.

5)

Create at least 2 icon images for normal and rollover state of the icon.
For example if the icon name is xyz the image names will be xyz_C_S.png and xyz_R_C_S.png.
(Here, C= color, S=regular, and R=rollover.) If, however, your icon preferences are set to have
large or greyscale icons instead of regular and color, you will use M and L in the icon names.
You can have 8 image files for the following possible combinations of preferences with the base
name as xyz:

37

FrameMaker basics

2

Preferences
Size
Large (L)

Regular
(S)

6)

Color

Icon names
Normal

Rollover

Colored (C)

xyz_C_L.png

xyz_R_C_L.png

Grayscale (M)

xyz_M_L.png

xyz_R_M_L.png

Colored (C)

xyz_C_S.png

xyz_R_C_S.png

Grayscale (M)

xyz_M_S.png

xyz_R_M_S.png

You can further add more icon files for icon states, such as dark_normal and dark_rollover by
specifying attributes with data in the relevant element. For example:


.png” 
dark_rollover=”.png”
dark_normal_l=”.png”
dark_rollover_l=”.png”/>

Smart catalogs
You can use the Smart catalog as a convenient shortcut to the catalogs available in FrameMaker. For
example, to set a paragraph format in a document, you use the Smart catalog to quickly search for
and select the required paragraph format. In a structured document, you can easily find the required
elements and attributes to insert at a point in the document.
See the video, Smart Catalogs.
To use the Smart catalog:
1)

Place the cursor at the required location in the document.
For instance, for character and paragraph formats, place the cursor inside a paragraph. For
elements and attributes in a structured document, place the pointer at the element insertion
location in the structure view.

2)

Press the Smart catalog shortcut key. See, the Smart catalog shortcut keys defined below.
The Smart catalog dialog displays.

38

FrameMaker basics
Smart catalog dialog

The focus of the pointer is now within the text box at the top of the dialog.
3)

To search for an item in the current catalog, start typing either the name of the item or the
description. As you type, the list in the dialog is narrowed down.
For example, if you want to insert a list element in a structured document, you can type the
name of the list element: ul, ol, or dl. You can, however, also type the description of the element,
list, and the dialog list is narrowed down to all the available list items in element catalog.
Filtered elements

NOTE: The list of displayed items in the dialog is limited to 10. If the list exceeds 10, you can use

the scrollbar to navigate up and down the list.
Smart catalog shortcut keys

Shortcut

Smart Catalog

Applies to...

F8, Ctrl + 8

Character catalog

Structured and Unstructured

F9, Ctrl + 9

Paragraph catalog

Structured and Unstructured

Ctrl + 1

Element catalog

Structured

Ctrl + 2

Wrap element

Structured

Ctrl + 3

Change element

Structured

39

FrameMaker basics

2

Shortcut

Smart Catalog

Applies to...

Ctrl + 4

Apply condition

Structured and Unstructured

Ctrl + 5

Remove condition

Structured and Unstructured

Ctrl + 7

Attributes catalog

Structured

Esc + q + o

Object styles catalog

Structured and Unstructured

NOTE: To restore the Hierarchical Element insert functionality available in FrameMaker 11.0, set the

EnableOldSmartInsert flag to ON in the maker.ini.

Status bar controls
The FrameMaker status bar provides all the navigational controls, pagination information, and
zoom controls.
Navigational controls on the status bar

A. First page B. Previous C. Go to page number D. Next E. Last page F. Go to line number G. Go to
insertion point H. Zoom controls
Zoom in and out

40

•

To magnify or decrease magnification, text, and objects, click the + (Increase Zoom) or (Decrease Zoom) buttons on the status bar. FrameMaker zooms in or out on the area of the
page containing the insertion point or selection. If the document doesn’t contain an insertion
point or a selection, FrameMaker zooms in on the center of the page.

•

To display text and objects at a particular magnification, select a percentage from the Zoom
pop-up menu.

•

To display the entire page in the current window, select Fit Page In Window from the Zoom
pop-up menu.

•

To fit the page or text frame to the window, select Fit Window To Page or Fit Window To Text
Frame from the Zoom pop-up menu. If the view options are set to display facing pages, the
window is resized to accommodate two pages side by side.

•

To change the available zoom settings, click Set from the Zoom pop-up menu, select the
percentage you want to change and enter the new percentage. Enter any percentage from 25%
to 1600%. Click Set. To return to the default percentages, click Get Defaults.

FrameMaker basics
•

To make 100% zoom match the page size, select File > Preferences > General. For Monitor Size,
specify the diagonal size of your monitor, and then click OK. If screen-to-paper fidelity is not
critical, leave Monitor Size set to Default, which ensures cross-application compatibility.

NOTE:You can customize the default zoom settings. For information, see the online manual Custom-

izing FrameMaker on the Adobe website www.adobe.com/go/lr_FrameMaker_support_en.
Turn pages and set scrolling
You can navigate through a document window using controls in the status bar.
You can also define how FrameMaker displays pages when you scroll up and down, left and right, or
two pages at a time.
If the document you are paging through is part of an open book, FrameMaker sometimes displays
an alert message prompting you to choose to open the next or previous document in the book. For
example, if you click Previous Page on the first page of a document, clicking Yes in the alert message
box opens the previous document in the book. The last page of that document appears.
1)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose View > Options.

3)

Choose one of the following options from the Page Scrolling pop-up menu:

4)

•

To display pages from top to bottom (for example, page 2 below page 1), choose Vertical.

•

To display pages from left to right (for example, page 2 to the right of page 1), choose
Horizontal.

•

To display pages two at a time, side by side, choose Facing Pages.

•

To display as many pages as will fit in the window from left to right, choose Variable.

Click Set.

Go to another page
Do one of the following:
•

To go to the next page, click the Next Page button.

•

To go to the previous page, click the Previous Page button.

•

To go to the first page in the document, click the First Page button.

•

To go to the last page in the document, click the Last Page button.

•

To go to a specific page, click in the Page Number area and specify the page number you want
to display.

41

FrameMaker basics

2

•

To go to a specific line number, click in the Line Number area and specify the line number you
want to display.

•

To go to the page containing the insertion point, click the Insertion Point button.

•

To move quickly through the pages, scroll vertically.
TIP:In case of structured documents, click or select in the Structure View to display the corre-

sponding page in the document window. This is often the quickest way to go to the page you want.

Viewing options
Faster page display
To display pages quickly:
•

Open the document by bypassing the update of imported graphics, cross-references, and text
insets. (Opening a document without updating references makes a document open faster but
can slow down the display of individual pages.)

•

Turn off the display of graphics by choosing View > Options, deselecting the Graphics option,
and clicking Set.
IMPORTANT:If you deselect the Graphics option and generate a PDF, the graphics do not appear

in the PDF.
•

Display small text as gray bars by choosing File > Preferences > General, entering a point size
in the Greek Screen Text Smaller box, and clicking Set. Whenever text in your document is in
a point size smaller than the size you specified, it appears on the screen as a gray bar.

Preset display units
Some text boxes in dialog boxes require a unit of measurement (such as points or inches) for the
value you enter. You can specify the default units for font size and line spacing (font size units) and
for other measurements (display units). The default units of measurement appear after the values in
the text boxes. If you enter a value without a unit of measurement, FrameMaker uses the default unit.
•

To change the preset units, make the appropriate window is active. Select View > Options.
Select the values for Display Units and Font Units, and then click Set.

•

To enter different units in a box, make the appropriate window active. Enter an abbreviation
for the unit along with the numeric value. Use cm for centimeters, mm for millimeters, "or in
for inches, pc, pi, or pica for picas, pt or point for points, dd for didots, cc or cicero for ciceros,
Q for Q units (refers to font size and line spacing for the Japanese language only).
FrameMaker converts the entry to the preset display units when you click a command button
in the dialog box. For example, if your document display units are picas and you want to set a

42

FrameMaker basics
paragraph indent of 1 inch, enter 1" in the First Indent box. When you click Apply, the
measurement changes to the number of picas that corresponds to 1 inch.
Spacing of ruler or grid intervals
1)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Select View > Options. Select a new setting from the Rulers menu or the Grid menu, and click
Set.

Line numbers
Line numbers in FrameMaker files help you identify particular lines of content. Line numbers are set
at a document level (for a .fm file) and appear before each inserted line in a FrameMaker document.
While using line numbers and change bars, ensure that they do not overlap.
Line numbers and change bars displayed in a FrameMaker file

Insert line numbers
To insert line numbers, complete the following steps:
NOTE: You can also use the View > Line Numbers to display/hide line numbers.

1)

Select Format > Document > Line Numbers.

2)

In the line number properties dialog, select Show line numbers and specify the following:

43

FrameMaker basics

a)

Width: Distance of line numbers from the column. The distance is relative to the
columns that contain text.

b)

Font: Font of the line numbers

c)

Size: Size of the line numbers

d)

Color: Color of the line numbers

e)

Restart at Each Page: Selecting this option restarts line numbers for each page

2

Some highlights of line numbers
1)

Support for multicolumn and multiflow formats: For files with multicolumn formats, line
numbers appear for text in each of the columns. For multi-flow documents, the line numbers
are calculated according to the text flows and continue accordingly.

2)

Recalculation: When you insert text within a paragraph with line numbers are enabled, the line
numbers are recalculated to accommodate the new text.

3)

Document level property: Line numbers are a document level property, so you can
enable/disable this feature for a document (.fm file). Line numbers can be set at a document
level to continue from previous page or restart at each page.

4)

Text flows: For multi-flow documents, the line numbers follow the text flows and continue
according to the text flows.

5)

XML documents: Line numbers do not persist in XML documents. However, you can enable
line numbers in the application template.

6)

Printing: Line numbers are visible in the print and PDF created using Save As PDF.

Visual guides
You can show several of these visual guides in a document window:

44

•

Borders around text frames, graphic frames, and imported objects

•

Markers, paragraph returns, and other symbols in running text

FrameMaker basics
•

Rulers along the top and left side of the window

You can also show a grid of horizontal and vertical lines for drawing, resizing, and aligning graphics.
All visual guides are non-printing, so you do not need to hide them when you print.
1)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Do the following:
•

To show or hide borders, select View > Borders.

•

To show or hide the text symbols, select View > Text Symbols.

•

To show or hide the rulers, select View > Rulers.

•

To show or hide grid lines, select View > Grid Lines.

•

To show the element boundaries, select View > Element Boundaries or Element Boundaries (As Tags) in Structured FrameMaker. FrameMaker automatically toggles these two
options.

Text symbols

Text symbol

Meaning
End of paragraph
End of flow and end of table cell
Tab
Anchored frame and table anchor
Marker
Forced return
Manual equation alignment point
Non-breaking space
Discretionary hyphen
Suppress hyphenation

45

FrameMaker basics

2

Subset of menu commands
You can display a subset of menu commands called quick menus. The quick menus do not have
commands for formatting text, editing some aspects of graphics, and inserting some objects such as
markers and variables.
If you do not see the full set of menu commands, the quick menus is probably displayed.
NOTE:If you’re using a structured document, your application developer can change the commands

available in the complete menus.
•

To display quick menus, select View > Menus > Quick.

•

To restore the complete menu, select View > Menus > Complete.

•

To customize menus, add, move, or remove menus and commands as described in the online
manual Customizing FrameMaker on the Adobe website www.adobe.com/go/lr_FrameMaker_support_en.

High-contrast workspace
FrameMaker uses system colors to draw window backgrounds, text, and other graphics. Users who
have trouble discerning colors or variations in contrast, or who have low visual acuity, can set
high-contrast color schemes and custom text and background colors. This setting makes the information in the user interface easier to view.
1)

Open the Windows Control Pod, double-click Accessibility Options, and select the Display
tab.

2)

Change contrast globally or change the color theme, as follows:
•

To change the appearance of all operating system windows at once, select the Use High
Contrast option.

•

To change the color theme, click Settings and select one of the High Contrast Appearance
Scheme options.

NOTE:FrameMaker does not adjust colors of all items. Some of these include the background color, and

the fill color of graphic objects.

Preferences dialog
Use the Preferences dialog (Edit > Preferences) to change FrameMaker settings.

46

FrameMaker basics

•

General Preferences - Use these preferences to specify settings, such as:
–

Product interface

–

File saving, naming, and backup

–

Handling of embedded objects

–

Cursor movement to handle right-to-left authoring environment

•

Interface preferences - Use this dialog box to specify whether FrameMaker should
auto-collapse pods to icons or always open documents as tabs, handle navigation in Structured
View, and set the size and color of icons.

•

Alerts - These settings control the display of warnings and contextual tips.

•

Pods - The pod location criteria determine what should be displayed in the pod list area for an
instance by way of identifying its location in the document.

•

Launch - The Launch preferences help you optimize the startup time of FrameMaker. Using
the Launch preferences, you can optimize the loading of the clients, fonts, language providers,
and startup scripts according to your requirement.

•

Dropbox - The Dropbox preferences help you set up the Dropbox app to work with
FrameMaker.

•

Documentum - Use these preferences to set up Documentum® file versioning, specify DFS
SDK path, and add custom CMS properties to FrameMaker for Documentum®.

47

FrameMaker basics

2

•

SharePoint - Use these preferences to set up SharePoint file versioning and add custom CMS
properties to FrameMaker for SharePoint.

•

DITAExchange - Use these preferences to set up DITA Exchange.

•

Dictionary - Use these preferences to specify Proximity or Hunspell dictionaries for Spelling,
Hyphenation, and Thesaurus for various languages.

•

Spelling Options - Use these preferences to set up Spell Checker.

•

Simplified XML - Use these preferences to enable or disable Simplified XML view and the alert
messages display options. For more information, see Simplified XML user interface.

•

XML - Use these preferences to set up syntax colors and other display options for XML content
in FrameMaker.

•

MathML - Use these preferences to set up the MathFlow Editor install path and specify the
license file path. You can also select the Style or Structure editor from this dialog.

Contextual tips
The contextual tips feature helps you find the new features introduced in FrameMaker, or find an
alternate method of performing a regular task. If there's a feature that is related to the current task
that you are performing, the contextual tips feature would show you the related feature's information
in the form of a tip. These useful tips help you perform your tasks easily and efficiently.
For example, the first time you open a new document, a tip appears at the lower-right corner of the
FrameMaker workspace.

The tip dialog box includes the following buttons:
•

?: Hover the mouse over this button to see how to turn these tips on or off.

•

ShowMe: This button is displayed for some specific tips only. Clicking this button opens the
respective pod that is being referred in the tip.

•

Details: Clicking this button takes you to the relevant Help content.

•

X: clicking this button closes the tip. To stop displaying any further messages, see Contextual
tips preferences.

Each tip appears only once for a specific workflow. For example, the next time you open a document,
the tip is not displayed. The attempt is to provide you the valuable information without being intru-

48

FrameMaker basics
sive. In this attempt, if you perform a workflow, FrameMaker assumes that either you have made use
of the information in the tip or you do not require that information.
Contextual tips preferences
To customize the contextual tips preferences, choose Edit > Preferences > Global > Alerts. The
following options related to the contextual tips are available at the bottom of the dialog:
Show Contextual Tips
Deselect this option to stop any further messages from displaying. This means that even if you
are performing a task for the first time, you will not be shown any tip or message.
Reset Contextual Tips
Click the Reset Contextual Tips button to start displaying tips again even for those workflows
that have been performed earlier. For example, a tip appears while saving a document, you rest
the contextual tips by clicking this button, next time when you save the document, the same
tip is displayed again.

Manage open files
Currently Opened Files pod lets you manage and navigate through large number of open files. Using
the Currently Opened Files pod, you can:
1)

Review and save files with unsaved changes

2)

Search for a file with a specific name or files saved in a particular folder

3)

Navigate across different files

4)

Review the path of the various open files

5)

Close specific files after saving or without saving
The Currently Opened Files pod

A. Select All, Unsaved, or Saved to filter results B. Save files and keep them open C. Save the selected
files and close them D. Close the selected files - if there are unsaved changes in the files you are trying
49

FrameMaker basics

2

to close, the Save Files dialog appears E. Search - As you type, the pod matches the search criteria
with entries in all the columns F. Clear search criteria G. Select all the currently opened files H. Select
the currently opened files
You can display the Currently Opened Files pod by selecting View > Pods > Currently Opened Files.
See the video: Currently opened files pod.
Save files on file close and exit
FrameMaker displays the Save Files dialog when you attempt any of the following:
•

•

•

Exit FrameMaker by
–

Clicking the Close button

–

Selecting File > Exit

–

Right clicking in the Status Bar and selecting Close all windows

–

Using Alt+F4 on the keyboard

Select Shift+File and select one of the following options
–

Close All Open Files

–

Close All Files in Book

–

Close All Files in Ditamap

Try to close files without saving in the Currently Opened Files pod
The Save Files dialog

In the Save Files dialog, you can review and save unsaved changes files. You can also discard the
changes by deselecting the files and clicking OK.

50

FrameMaker basics
Save and close open files
You can see a list of currently open documents in the Currently Opened Files pod. Using the
Currently Opened Files pod, you can select the files and changes to save and discard.
Save
1)

Do one of the following:
•

Select File > Currently Opened Files.

•

Select View > Pods > Currently Opened Files.

FrameMaker displays the Currently Opened Files pod. Unsaved files and files with unsaved
changes are indicated with asterisk (*). To locate files in a long list, type in the Search box.
FrameMaker matches the text in the name of the file as well as the path.
2)

Select the files to be saved and do one of the following:
•

Click Save.
FrameMaker saves the selected files. FrameMaker prompts you to specify the name and
path of the files that are not saved to the disk yet.

•

Click Save and Close.
FrameMaker saves and closes the selected files.

•

Close Files.
FrameMaker closes the selected files. If you choose to close any files with unsaved
changes, the List Of All Open Files dialog appears.

Restore last session
FrameMaker allows you to restore the last session you were working on when you last exited
FrameMaker or it crashed. In case of a crash, when you launch FrameMaker again, FrameMaker
displays an alert where you can choose whether or not to restore the last session. By restoring the last
session, you can reinstate the following as you were working on them in the last session:
•

View: XML Code, WYSIWYG, or Author

•

Workspace

•

The document in focus

•

The files open in the last session (Except the files open through the CMS connector in the last
session)

•

Page numbers in focus for different documents

•

The scroll space for the master, body and reference pages

51

FrameMaker basics

2

•

Tab order of the documents

•

Palettes (such as Equation, Templates, and Thesaurus browser)

•

stuctapps.fm file: The last read structapps.fm file (On restore, the last read structapps.fm file is
read again)

See the video: Single click session restore.
Conditions to restore last session
If all the following conditions are met, you can restore last session:
1)

There were files open when you exited FrameMaker or it crashed. In other words, there is
something to restore in the last session. If you exit files FrameMaker after manually closing the
files, there is nothing to restore.

2)

There are no open files when you try to restore the last session

3)

The current mode of FrameMaker (Structured, Unstructured, or XML Author) is same as
FrameMaker’s last exit mode.

Steps to restore the last session
To restore FrameMaker’s last session, launch FrameMaker and do one of the following:
•

Click Restore Last Session on the starter screen.
OR

•

Select File > Restore Last Session.
OR

•

Use the keyboard shortcut Esc r s.

•

In case FrameMaker crashes, when you relaunch FrameMaker, FrameMaker displays an alert
message where you can click Yes to restore the last session.

FrameMaker restores the last session. If there are some files that could not be restored, FrameMaker
displays an error message and lists the files in the console.
Preferences for alerts on restore
In the preferences dialog, you can select whether or not to display the alerts, such as missing fonts
and unresolved cross references, on session restore. The alerts that require user action, such as
missing graphics, appear even when you have disabled the alerts.

52

FrameMaker basics

Restore dimensions of Resource Manager views
FrameMaker retains the dimensions of the following RM Views on exit and relaunch:
•

RM View for Book

•

RM View for CMS Repository Browser

•

RM View for Ditamap

FrameMaker retains the dimensions of the RM views and uses them as default dimensions of these
RM views when you close and open them again.
•

For undocked RM views, FrameMaker retains the width as well as height.

•

For docked RM views, FrameMaker retains the width only.

The width that is retained for docked and undocked RM views is different. The dimensions retained
for different RM Views, such as Book and Ditamap, are the same.

Tips to work with the user interface
Select the brightness
Select the brightness by using the UI Brightness options under Preferences > Interface.
Combine document windows
To consolidate all document windows, floating, minimized, or docked, right-click the tab bar
of the docked document window and select Consolidate All To Here from the menu.
Float document windows
Click Arrange Documents icon on the top Application bar and select Float All In Windows.
This arranges all the document windows as cascaded floating pods.
Tile documents
Use the Arrange Documents icon to tile document windows vertically or horizontally. This is
especially useful for manually comparing documents and layering them side by side.
Bring hidden pods to the front
Sometimes while working with floating document windows or when switching workspaces,
the pods may seem difficult to bring to the front.
•

Undock the pods by dragging them out using the pod title bar.

•

Dock all floating document windows. Right-click the docked tab bar and select Consolidate All To Here or drag and dock the floating document windows.

53

FrameMaker basics

2

Minimize pods to icons
Right-click on the pods tab bar and select Collapse To Icons from the menu. This option is
available only if the pods are floating and not docked. To collapse docked pods, click anywhere
in the tab bar.
Reopen the pods
Choose View > Pods and click any pod name. The entire group of pods open at the bottom of
the workspace.
Reopen a pod
Choose Windows and select Pods and select the pod you want to reopen.
Collapse all open pod groups to icons
Right-click the tab bar of the pod group and select Collapse To Icons.
Exit the full screen mode
Right-click outside the text frame in the document window and select Toggle Screen Mode.
RELATED LINKS:
Screen modes

Accessibility
The FrameMaker software provides a number of features that improve access for visually impaired
users. In particular, it:
•

Provides support for high-contrast viewing for users with low visual acuity.

•

Creates tagged Adobe PDF files when converting FrameMaker files to tagged PDF, making it
easier for people who use screen reader software to navigate a document in the proper reading
order. For information on how to turn your FrameMaker documents into tagged Adobe PDF
files, see Tagged PDF output.

•

Supports assistive technology, such as screen reader software for the Windows® platform.

Screen readers let visually impaired users interact with the computer by interpreting what is
happening on the screen and sending that information to speech-synthesis devices. The screen
reader will follow the logical structure of the document. Screen readers can read FrameMaker documents viewed in FrameMaker, or tagged PDF documents viewed in Adobe Acrobat® or Adobe
Reader®. Refer to your screen reader documentation for information on installation and use with
documents viewed in FrameMaker or Acrobat.
For more information on accessibility in Adobe Acrobat and Adobe PDF documents, see the
Acrobat online Help and the Adobe website.

54

FrameMaker basics

Launch the soft keyboard
1)

From the Start menu, select Programs > Accessories > Accessibility > On-Screen Keyboard.

2)

Click OK. You can then start using the onscreen keyboard.

RELATED LINKS:
High-contrast workspace

Documents
Create a document
FrameMaker provides several templates upon which you can base your documents. Alternatively,
you can choose to use a template defined by your organization or create a blank document.
By default, FrameMaker documents have a .fm extension.
Use a template to create a document
You can create a document using a template. Your organization may have predefined templates for
different types of documents. Do the following to create a document based upon a predefined
template:
1)

Select File > New > Document.

2)

Do one of the following:

Choose a standard template
a)

Click Explore Standard Templates.

b)

In the Standard Templates dialog, select a template. For example, User Guide—Legal.

c)

Click Create to create a document based upon the selected template.
NOTE: Optionally, click Show Sample to preview the document in a new document

tab. This option closes the Standard Templates dialog. To return to the dialog once
you’ve viewed the sample, select File > New > Document > Explore Standard
Templates again.
Choose a structured template
a)

Click Explore Structured Templates.

b)

In the Structured Templates dialog, select a template. For example, Business—Memo.

c)

Click Create to create a document based upon the selected template.
55

FrameMaker basics

2
NOTE: Optionally, click Show Sample to preview the document in a new document

tab. This option closes the Structured Templates dialog. To return to the dialog once
you’ve viewed the sample, select File > New > Document > Explore Structured
Templates again.
Choose a custom template
a)

Navigate to the document that you want to use as a template for the new document.

b)

Click New.

Choose an RTL template
a)

Navigate to the Templates folder (Fm_Install_Location\Templates).

b)

Click on the RTLTemplate.fm file.

c)

Click New.

NOTE: This creates a blank document with its direction set as right-to-left.

3)

Add content to the document.

Create a blank document
You may want to start with a blank FrameMaker document if you’re defining a template for your
organization or team.
1)

Select File > New > Document.

2)

Specify the basic page layout:
•

To create a standard one-column document, click Portrait or Landscape.

•

To create a document with custom page size, columns, column margins, and pagination
settings, click Custom, specify the required values, and click Create.
You can also select a measurement unit for the document. FrameMaker displays
measurements in dialog boxes and in the document window’s status bar in the selected
unit.

3)

Add content to the document.

Set the direction of a document
FrameMaker allows you to author documents in both left-to-right (LTR) and right-to-left (RTL)
scripts (such as Arabic, Hebrew, and Farsi). However, you can change the direction of the current
document.

56

1)

Choose Format > Document > Direction.

2)

In the Direction sub-menu, choose left-to-right or right-to-left.

FrameMaker basics
The position of the insertion point changes based on the direction of the document.

Open a document
In addition to FrameMaker documents, you can open text files, files in MIF (Maker Interchange
Format), files in MML (Maker Markup Language), and XML and SGML documents. If the required
filter is installed, you can also open files created in other applications, such as Microsoft® Word.
Much of the file’s formatting is retained when you open the file.
To open files created using FrameMaker 7 or earlier, you must save them as MIF files.
Open a file
1)

Select File > Open.

2)

Locate the document and click Open.

Opening a document usually updates graphics imported by reference, text insets, cross-references,
and system variables (if any exist). Recently opened files are listed at the bottom of the File menu.
Messages alerting you to possible issues with the file sometimes appear. You can click OK and
resolve the problems later.
NOTE: You can also drag-and-drop files from Windows Explorer to the document window, empty UI

areas, toolbars, menu bars, or pods to open the files.
Open a text file
Text-only files do not contain graphics or formatting information. When you open a text-only file,
you are asked to confirm that it is a text file.
1)

Select File > Open, and open a .txt file. The Unknown File Type dialog box appears.

2)

Select the Text option.

3)

Click Convert.

4)

Select one of the following options:
•

To break the text into paragraphs only at blank lines, select Merge Lines Into Paragraphs.
Use this option for a paragraph-oriented text file, such as a file containing document text.

•

To break the text into paragraphs at the end of each line, select Treat Each Line As A
Paragraph. Use this option for a line-oriented text file, such as a file containing computer
code.

57

FrameMaker basics
•

2

To convert the text into a table, select the Convert Text To Table. Use this option if the
content of your source file is tabulated.
Select additional options in the Convert To Table dialog box, such as number of columns,
cell separators, and heading rows, to obtain the data in the appropriate tabular form.

5)

Select the desired Encoding scheme. By default, the ANSI (Windows) encoding scheme is
selected.

6)

Click Read. The text appears in a document that is created from a special template. You can
customize the template so that documents created from text files are formatted differently.

Open a document in use
A lock file (*.lck) is created every time you open a document. This lock file prevents others from
changing the file while you work in it. A lock file is in the same folder as the original document and
is removed when you close the document. You can turn off file locking.
If you try to open a document that’s already open and if you have write permission to the document,
a dialog box displays the name of the document, who opened it last and when, and the computer on
which it is open. You sometimes see this dialog box after a system crash when you open a document
you were last using.
Open the file and do one of the following:
•

If you want to look at the file but not change it, click Open For Viewing Only, and then click
Continue. The document appears in View Only format.

•

If you want to edit a copy of the file, click Open Copy For Editing, and then click Continue. A
copy of the file is opened and when you save this file you are prompted to provide a new filename.

•

If you want to edit the file and you know that no one else is using it, click Reset Lock And Open,
and then click Continue. Use this option after a system crash to edit a document that was open
at the time of the crash.

Open a document without updating references
A document opens more slowly if it contains many cross-references to other files, large imported
graphics, or many text insets. You can open a document faster by bypassing the update of imported
graphics, cross-references, and text insets. However, if you use this method to open documents, keep
in mind that FrameMaker does not warn you about missing items or unresolved cross-references.
For this reason, it is best to occasionally open a document in the usual way.

58

1)

Choose File > Open, and select the file you want to open.

2)

Control-click Open.

FrameMaker basics
After the file is open, FrameMaker imports and displays graphics as needed on a page-by-page basis.
You can manually update cross-references and text insets by using Edit > Update References. If the
page display is too slow, reopen the document in the usual way.
SGML, XML, MIF, and MML are all text formats, so they open as text in unstructured FrameMaker.
In the case of .xml or .mif files in structured FrameMaker, control-clicking the Open button opens
them as text files. You are prompted to specify the text reading options in the Reading Text File
dialog box. Opening these files as text lets you view or edit the markup.
Markup in an SGML file

Reopen a file after a system crash
If your system crashes, the file is saved automatically in the following situations:
•

If you selected Automatic Save in the Preferences dialog box, autosave files (whose filename
contains .auto) are created at the specified interval. This file is deleted when you save and close
a file.

•

If your system becomes unstable, FrameMaker tries to create a recover file (filename contains
.recover) with your most recent changes.

An automatically saved copy of the file contains recent changes to the file.
1)

Open the file you were working on last.

2)

Do one of the following:
•

If a recover file exists, open it when prompted and check whether your latest changes are
there. If they are, save the recover file with the same name as the document you were originally working on and then delete the recover file.

•

If no recover file exists, open the autosave file when prompted and save it with the same
name as the document you were originally working on. The autosave file contains all the
changes you made until the time of the last automatic save. The amount of work lost
depends on the time interval you set between saves and when your system crashed.

59

FrameMaker basics

2

Troubleshooting unavailable fonts
You sometimes get an alert message that indicates the document you are opening uses unavailable
fonts. Fonts can become unavailable for a few reasons:
•

The document was edited on a different system using fonts that are not installed on your
system.

•

A font is removed or has become damaged.

•

The default printer for your system has changed.

If the Remember Missing Font Names option in the Preferences dialog box is selected, FrameMaker
preserves the names of unavailable fonts. Selecting this option causes the original fonts to reappear
when you open the document on a computer that has the fonts installed, even if you save the document with substitute fonts.
To fix the problem of missing fonts, consider the following options:
Check for damaged fonts
Determine whether the fonts that are unavailable in FrameMaker are installed on your system
and available in another application. If another application can use fonts that FrameMaker
cannot use, the fonts may be damaged. Reinstall them using the original media. For more
information on troubleshooting font problems, isolating damaged fonts or a damaged fonts
folder, or reinstalling PostScript fonts, see the Adobe website.
Remap unavailable fonts
If you cannot install or reinstall the unavailable fonts, you may want to permanently remap the
unavailable fonts to available fonts, so that the alert message does not appear when you open
the document. You do this by deselecting the Remember Missing Font Names option in the
Preferences dialog box before you open the file. However, be aware that doing this causes you
to lose the original font information referenced in the document.
Switch printers
FrameMaker reads font information stored in the printer driver so that it can make fonts
stored at the printer available for use within FrameMaker. In some cases, changing the default
printer can change one or more fonts available in FrameMaker.
Obtain and install the missing fonts
For example, if you and a co-worker are editing the same documents, and you would like to
use the same fonts as your co-worker, consider purchasing and installing copies of the fonts.

Save a document
You can save a document using its current name and location, or save a copy of the document using
a different name or location. You can save a document in several formats, including Hypertext
Markup Language (HTML), Extensible Markup Language (XML), and Portable Document Format
(PDF).
60

FrameMaker basics
When a document or a book has unsaved changes, an asterisk (*) appears in the Page Status area of
the status bar.
An asterisk indicates unsaved changes.

RELATED LINKS:
Save as PDF
Import properties from a template

Save a document
1)

Do one of the following:
•

To save changes in the current file, choose File > Save.

•

To save the file in a different folder or with a different filename, choose File > Save As.

2)

If you choose the Save As command, or if the file has never been saved, specify the new filename and location. If you want to save the file in a different format, choose the format from
the pop-up menu.

3)

Click Save. If you choose Text Only format, specify how to treat the text and tables in the document.

Save a book
1)

2)

Do one of the following:
•

To overwrite the current version on the disk, choose File > Save Book.

•

To save the file in a different folder or using a different name, choose File > Save Book As.

If you choose the Save Book As command, or if the file has never been saved, specify the new
filename and location.

Save all open documents
Hold down Shift and choose File > Save All Open Files.
Return to the saved version of your document
Choose File > Revert To Saved and click OK.
File formats you can save in
You can use the Save As command to save a file in the following formats:
61

FrameMaker basics

2

Document 2015
Saves the FrameMaker document or book as a document or book that you can open and edit
in FrameMaker.
XML
Creates an XML document that can be used for data exchange and viewed on the World Wide
Web.
View Only 2015
Produces a book or document that you can open but cannot edit. If you accidentally save a file
in View Only format, you can make it editable by pressing Esc Shift+f l (lowercase L) k. Then
you can save the document or book in Document or Book format.
Document 12.0
Saves the FrameMaker document or book as a document or book that you can open and edit
in FrameMaker version 12.
NOTE: To save a FrameMaker 12 document as a FrameMaker 9.0 or prior version’s document,

save the document as a MIF 7.0 document, open the MIF 7.0 document in FrameMaker 9.0 or
prior, and Save the document in the desired format.
MIF 2015
Creates a text file containing FrameMaker 2015 statements that describe all text and graphics.
To avoid overwriting your original document, save the MIF file under a different name. (For
example, add a .mif extension to the name.) For information on MIF, see the MIF Referenceguide.
MIF 7.0
Creates a text file containing FrameMaker 7.0 statements that describe all text and graphics. To
avoid overwriting your original document, save the MIF file under a different name. (For
example, add a .mif extension to the name.) For information on MIF, see the online manual
MIF Reference.
Text Only
Creates a text file without graphics or formatting information. To avoid overwriting your original document, save the text file under a different name. (For example, add a .text extension to
the name.)
PDF
Creates a Portable Document Format (PDF) file that can be viewed in Adobe Acrobat® and
other applications that support PDF files.
SGML
Creates an SGML file with the content, elements, and attributes from your document.

62

FrameMaker basics
HTML
Creates an HTML document that can be viewed on the World Wide Web. For information on
adjusting the mapping of paragraph and character tags to predefined HTML elements, see Set
up and adjust HTML mappings.
NOTE:When you save a structured FrameMaker document as HTML, all attributes with the same

name are mapped to the same value, even if the attributes have different values for different
elements. To use different values for these attributes after exporting, use a text editor to edit the
resulting file.
Microsoft RTF
Create files in Rich Text Format 1.6 (RTF), which is supported by many word processors and
can be read by other applications. Most formatting is preserved as formats are usually
converted to word-processing styles.
NOTE:You can use the Print command to save a PostScript®file.

RELATED LINKS:
Create PostScript files
Using Save As to export to other formats
Set up and adjust HTML mappings

Filename extensions for saved files
When you save a file for the first time in Windows, FrameMaker automatically adds these extensions: .fm for documents, .book for book files, and .mif for MIF files. With these extensions, the files
are recognized as FrameMaker files by the Windows operating system.
If you don’t want these special extensions added to the filenames you assign, enclose the filenames
in double quotation marks. Windows doesn’t recognize a file without one of these extensions as a
FrameMaker file, but you can still open the file in FrameMaker.
If you assign an extension that’s registered by another application, such as .doc, the extension is not
replaced by the FrameMaker extension and you can still open the file in FrameMaker.
Save documents in text-only format
Saving a document in text-only format creates a text file with the text encoding of your choice: ANSI
(Windows), or ASCII. (On Japanese-language systems, you can also use JIS, Shift-JIS, or EUC. On
other Asian-language systems, you can use encoding for the supported languages.) Only ordinary
text—those in text frames and tables—is saved; graphics, text in graphic callouts, footnotes, and
formatting information are not saved. Reformat line lengths and hyphenation as needed before
saving the file.
If some characters are not available in the text encoding that you choose, those characters are
replaced in the text file. For example, when you save a document in Text Only format using ANSI

63

FrameMaker basics

2

(Windows) or ASCII encoding, spaces (including thin, en, em, and numeric spaces) are converted
to regular spaces.
1)

Choose File > Save As.

2)

Specify the filename and location, and choose Text Only format.

3)

Click Save.

4)

Do one of the following:

5)

6)

•

To break each line into a separate paragraph, click At The End Of Each Line. This option
maintains a file’s original line breaks and blank lines. Use this option for a line-oriented
file such as computer code.

•

To merge adjacent lines into paragraphs and insert a carriage return only at blank lines,
click Only Between Paragraphs. Use this option for paragraph-oriented files, such as files
containing document text.

If you want to save table text, select Include Text From Table Cells. Then do the following:
•

Specify the order in which you want the table cells saved (row by row or column by
column).

•

Choose whether to separate cells with tabs or with carriage returns by choosing items
from the pop-up menus.

If the text file will be used on a platform that uses a different text encoding, choose an appropriate encoding from the Text Encoding pop-up menu, and then click Save.

RELATED LINKS:
Control hyphenation
Indentation, alignment, and spacing

Use Save As to export XML from unstructured documents
You can export both structured and unstructured files to XML. The mapping used to specify what
element to create for each paragraph tag in the source FrameMaker file is defined on a reference
page. The export function creates an XML file and a corresponding cascading style sheet (CSS),
which can be used with the document.
1)

64

Do one of the following:
•

Select File > Save As XML.

•

Select File > Save As and choose XML from the pop-up menu. Give the filename an
extension of .xml.

2)

Specify the file location.

3)

Click Save.

FrameMaker basics
Back up and save automatically
FrameMaker can back up and save your work automatically.
1)

Choose Edit > Preferences.

2)

In General preferences, do the following:

3)

•

To create a backup file every time you save, select Automatic Backup On Save. This
option creates a copy of the file before your latest changes are saved. If a backup file exists,
the new backup file overwrites it. (The filenames of backup files contain .backup.)

•

To create an autosave file at regular intervals, select Automatic Save and enter an interval
(in minutes) in the box. This causes a copy of the file to be saved periodically without
your having to choose File > Save. (The filenames of autosave files contain .auto.) When
you save manually or revert to the last saved version with the Revert To Saved command,
the autosave file is deleted.

Click OK.

Add metadata to a document
FrameMaker includes built-in support for Extensible Metadata Platform (XMP). Metadata, or file
information, is descriptive information that can be searched and processed by a computer. Use it to
provide information about the contents of a document, and to preserve information about a document that will be opened in other Adobe applications. If you export the file to PDF, much of this
metadata will appear in Acrobat.
Metadata tags travel with the document and describe its content. By embedding them in your documents, you make the documents easier to track, manage, and retrieve.
NOTE:Metadata in a book file sometimes overrides metadata in a document file. If your document is
part of a book file, open the book file and select the document before you add metadata.

1)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose File > File Info.

3)

Enter the desired information in the box next to any or all categories.

4)

For Marked, choose Yes if the document is copyrighted, or No if the document is explicitly in
the public domain. Choose Unknown if you’re not sure.

5)

Click Set.

65

FrameMaker basics

2

Apply a template to an open document
You can import formats from a template or a different document to an open document. Formats that
you can import include paragraph formats, table formats, variable definitions, and other properties.
You can also retain or remove any format overrides in the document. For example, changes made to
a paragraph but not stored in the Paragraph Catalog.
Templates in FrameMaker
FrameMaker templates store the following properties for reuse across documents.
1)

Paragraph, character, and table formats

2)

Page layouts that determine the number and position of columns on pages, and background
items such as running headers

3)

Reference pages that store often-used graphics and formatting information. For example, the
tip and caution icons.

4)

Variables you use as placeholders for text. For example,  and .
For more information, see Variables.

5)

Formatting information for cross-references, equations, and conditional tags

6)

Definitions for colors that you can apply to text and objects

7)

Document-wide settings, including footnote properties, custom marker types, and feathering
options for line spacing

8)

On Japanese-language system, specifications for combined Japanese and Western fonts

For more information, see Page layout and templates.
Available import and update settings
When you import formatting information from a template, FrameMaker merges the information
into the document rather than completely replacing the information. For example, when you import
paragraph formats, FrameMaker adds the formats to the document’s Paragraph Catalog. If any
formats have the same name in both documents, the imported format overwrites the original format.
Any formats that are not overwritten remain in the document.
Format names are case-sensitive, so Body is not the same as body.
Paragraph formats: The template’s Paragraph Catalog is merged into the document, and all formats
in the catalog are reapplied in the document. The template’s PDF bookmark settings are also copied
into the document.
Character formats: The template’s Character Catalog is merged into the document, and all formats
in the catalog are reapplied to the document.

66

FrameMaker basics
Page layouts: The template’s master pages are merged into the document, and body pages are
updated with the master page changes. If the template and the document both have a master page
with the same name, the template’s master page replaces the document’s. FrameMaker copies the
change bar properties, all the settings in the Page Size and Pagination dialog boxes, and most settings
in the View Options dialog box.
Table formats: The template’s Table Catalog and ruling styles are merged into the document, and
all formats in the catalog are reapplied in the document.
Color definitions: The template’s color definitions and views are merged into the document.
Document properties: The template’s custom marker types and footnote properties are merged into
the document. These properties include:
•

Volume, chapter, page, paragraph, footnote, and table footnote numbering

•

Styles in the Numbering Properties dialog box

•

Characters in the Allow Line Breaks After setting in the Text Options dialog box

•

Feather settings in the Line Layout dialog box

PDF Setup settings (other than the bookmark settings) are also merged into the document.
NOTE: On Japanese-language systems, the rubi properties and kumihan rules (Japanese-language type-

setting rules) are merged into the document as well.
Reference pages: All the template’s reference pages (except for FrameMath reference pages) are
merged into the document. If the template and the document both have a reference page with the
same name, the template’s reference page replaces the document’s. To import FrameMath reference
pages, select Math Definitions. See Equations.
Variable definitions: The template’s variable definitions are merged into the document.
Cross-reference formats: The template’s cross-reference formats are merged into the document,
and internal cross-references are updated.
Conditional text settings: The template’s condition tags and Show/Hide settings are merged into
the document and applied to conditional text.
Math definitions: The template’s equation size and font settings, custom math element definitions,
and FrameMath reference pages are copied into the document. If a custom math element in the
document is deleted when the reference pages are merged, FrameMaker replaces the math element
in equations with the name of the element enclosed by question marks.
Combined fonts: On Japanese-language systems, the specifications for combined Japanese and
Western fonts are merged into the document and applied to text that uses combined fonts.

67

FrameMaker basics

2

Import formats
You can import formats from an open template or document. With the document open, perform the
following steps:
1)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to update.

2)

In the document or book you’re updating, choose File > Import > Formats.

3)

Do one of the following:

4)

•

To import formats from a different open document, choose the document from the
Import From Document pop-up menu. The pop-up menu lists all documents that are
open and in the saved state.

•

To reapply formats from the current document, choose Current from the Import From
Document pop-up menu.

Select the Import And Update Settings that you want to apply to the current document. By
default, all options are selected.
TIP:To deselect or select all options at once, click Deselect All or Select All. If you’re updating vari-

able definitions, cross-reference formats, or math definitions, and if any of these items use character formats, select Character Formats so that the formats are added to the document.
5)

6)

To remove changes that you made to individual formats and didn’t save in a catalog, do the
following:
•

To remove page breaks that are not a part of a Paragraph Catalog format, select Manual
Page Breaks.

•

To remove paragraph, character, page layout, and table formatting overrides, select
Other Format/Layout Overrides.

Click Import.

Document direction
FrameMaker allows you to author documents in both left-to-right (LTR) as well as right-to-left
(RTL) scripts such as Arabic, Hebrew, and Farsi. You can also choose to You can also choose to
author multi-directional documents. This means that you can author a document in a specific direction that includes parts authored in the other direction. For example, you can author a document in
a LTR script such as English that includes paragraphs (see Paragraph Designer) and tables (see
Change the direction of text in table) authored in RTL scripts such as Arabic, Hebrew, and Farsi. Or
you can author a multi-flow document contains one flow (text frame) in an LTR language and
another flow in an RTL language. For details, see Set flow direction.

68

FrameMaker basics
Document containing text authored in LTR (English) and RTL (Arabic, Hebrew, and Farsi) scripts

Besides the text in a document, you can also change the orientation (flip) of the images in a document based on the direction of the document (see Change direction of document containing
objects). You can add multi-directional text lines to the images in your documents (see Add a text
line to a graphic).
You can define a mini TOC in a FrameMaker document in which the direction either LTR or RTL.
You can also copy and paste such text to and from FrameMaker documents (see Import Microsoft
Word files).
NOTE: When you import or copy text of a specific direction into a FrameMaker document, you need to

ensure the text direction of the destination location (document, table, or paragraph) is set to the same
direction.
FrameMaker provides out-of-the-box document direction support for both unstructured documents (see Set the direction of a document) and DITA topics (see Change text direction). However,
for structured documents based on other structured applications, the application developer will
need to define the dir property in the EDD. For details, see the Structured applications reference
guide.

Inheritance design
The direction authoring support in FrameMaker is based on an inheritance design. By default, the
objects in a document inherit the direction of the document. For example, direction of the paragraphs or tables inserted into a RTL document will be RTL. FrameMaker uses this inheritance design
to allow you to author multi-direction documents.

Caret location and movement
By default, the cursor in an RTL enabled document moves right to left as your type. FrameMaker
now has system of a strong (primary) caret and a weak (secondary) caret. The strong caret indicates
where an inserted character will be displayed when that character's direction is the same as the base
direction of the text. The weak caret shows where an inserted character will be displayed when the
character's direction is the opposite to the base direction.

69

FrameMaker basics

2

To change the movement behavior of the caret:
1)

Open the Preferences dialog (Choose Edit > Preferences).

2)

In the Caret Movement group, choose Logical to ensure that the key movement remains the
same as the logical order of inserted characters.
Choose Visual to ensure that the cursor movement is in the direction of the keys. For example,
the left key moves the cursor in the left direction.

Asian language support
FrameMaker provides the option to choose Layout Engine at the paragraph level by specifying paragraph property Asian Composer.
Whenever you select a font that has double byte encoding or is a CJK language font in paragraph
designer, you need to check the Use Asian Composer option.
When a legacy document is opened, for all paragraphs containing double byte font or Rubi text this
property is switched on so that Asian layout engine will be used for those paragraphs.
Since the two layout engines have different capabilities, scenarios may arise wherein neither engine
can handle the text correctly. For example, if a paragraph contains both Rubi and Arabic text, neither
engine can handle both of these correctly.
You can also choose to not show this alert and instruct FrameMaker to automatically switch to Asian
language support.

70

1)

Open the Preferences dialog (Edit > Preferences).

2)

Go to the Global > Alerts tab.

3)

Select the Automatically switch to Asian Composer checkbox.

Page layout and templates

Page layout and templates
Multiple components make up a FrameMaker template. These components include paragraph
formats, character formats, master page layouts, reference pages, and cross-reference formats. Both
unstructured and structured templates require careful planning and upfront design before you
create a template.

Formats

Paragraph formats
Paragraph formats contain settings for how the text looks and the format applies to the entire paragraph. Paragraph formats are the basis of document formatting in unstructured FrameMaker documents though they can also be the basis of document formatting in structured FrameMaker
documents.
Paragraph Designer
The Paragraph Designer is used to create and manage paragraph formats.
Paragraph Designer

71

Page layout and templates

3

A (Basic)
Paragraph properties such as indentation, spacing, and alignment.
B (Default Font)
Font properties such as font family, size, angle, weight, background color, and language. The
Language drop-down list allows you to select LTR languages such as, English, German, Thai
and RTL languages such as, Arabic, Hebrew, and Farsi.
C (Pagination)
Pagination properties such as Keep With and format properties such as In Column, Across All
Columns
D (Numbering)
Use the available building blocks to define a numbering format.
E (Advanced)
Properties such as automatic hyphenation and word spacing.
F (Asian)
Apply Asian language settings such as Asian character spacing. Includes the Use Asian
Composer checkbox to choose the FrameMaker Layout Engine (see Asian language support).
G (Table Cell)
Paragraph properties applied to a table cell.
H (Direction)
Specify the paragraph direction to as is, inherit (default), right-to-left, and left-to-right.
The Paragraph Catalog lists all the paragraph formats available for a document. To apply a paragraph tag, select the text and select the tag from the Paragraph Catalog.

72

Page layout and templates
Paragraph Catalog

Create a paragraph format
1)

Click in a paragraph whose format is like the one you want to create. Be careful not to select
multiple paragraphs so that no properties are set to As Is.

2)

Choose New Format from the Commands pop-up menu in the Paragraph Designer and enter
a name for the new format in the Tag box.

3)

To later update the new format or copy it to other documents by using the File > Import >
Formats command, select Store In Catalog. Formats that aren’t stored in the catalog can be
applied to other paragraphs only by copying and pasting.

4)

To apply the new format to the current paragraph, select Apply To Selection.

5)

Click Create.

6)

If you didn’t select Apply To Selection in step 4, choose the new format name from the Paragraph Tag pop-up menu.

7)

Modify any of the properties you want.
Don’t set any property to As Is. Paragraph formats must have all properties specified.

8)

Click Update All.

Character formats
Character tags allow you to format one or more characters or words inside a paragraph. By applying
character tags, you can quickly format text without overriding the properties of the entire paragraph.
Creating character tags helps maintain format consistency as well as apply format changes globally.
73

Page layout and templates

3

Character tags also serve as building blocks for other FrameMaker features, such as cross-reference
formats or variables.
Character Designer
The Character Designer is used to create and manage character formats. All character formats are
listed in the character catalog.
Character Designer

A. Character tag list B. Font properties C. Set the language for the character tag D. Commands menu
E. Tsume property F. Text background color properties
Select As Is for the properties that you want the paragraph tag to determine. For example, when
creating an Italics character tag, set all other properties to As Is and change just the Angle setting to
Italic. The font, font size, style, and other settings of the paragraph tag are preserved.
In FrameMaker, these PDF comments are imported with the highlighting retained due to the implementation of the text background color feature.
Set the text background color from the character and paragraph designers.
The Character Catalog lists all the character formats available for a document. To apply a character
tag, select the text and select the tag from the Character Catalog.

74

Page layout and templates
Character Catalog

Create a character format
1)

In the Character Designer, choose Set Window To As Is from the Commands pop-up menu.
Properties set to As Is do not change when you apply the character format. When set to As Is,
text boxes are blank, check boxes are dim, and pop-up menus display As Is.

2)

Change only the properties you want to include in the character format.

3)

Choose New Format from the Commands pop-up menu in the Character Designer, and enter
a name for the new format in the Tag box.

4)

Select Store In Catalog.

5)

To apply the new format to the current selection, select Apply To Selection.

6)

Click Create.

Manage formats
FrameMaker provides features to manage various paragraph, character, and table formats from the
respective designers and catalogs.
Update formats
You can change format properties and then use them to redefine, or update, the stored formats and
all the text in the document tagged with them.
When you update a format, you can update all properties or just one group of properties. For
example, you can change the default font family for all formats in a document without changing any
other properties.

75

Page layout and templates

3

Importing paragraph or character fonts is also possible through the File > Import > Formats
command.
Update a paragraph or character format

1)

For paragraph format changes, indicate the scope of the changes you want to make by doing
one of the following:
•

To update one paragraph format or all paragraph formats in the document with a property group from a paragraph, click in that paragraph or select consecutive paragraphs.

•

To update more than one paragraph format but not all paragraph formats, select consecutive paragraphs that use the formats you want to update.

2)

Choose the appropriate designer.

3)

Display the properties by doing one of the following:

4)

•

To display the properties of a paragraph including any overrides, click in the paragraph.

•

To display properties of a format stored in the catalog, choose the format from the Paragraph Tag or Character Tag pop-up menu.

Change any properties, and then click Update All. FrameMaker asks whether you want to
remove overrides.

TIP:If you change properties in a designer and then decide against updating the format, you can cancel

the operation and reset the properties by clicking in text. You can also choose Reset Window From
Selection from the Commands pop-up menu in the designer.
Update specific format properties or single property group
1)

Choose one of the following:
•

If you are updating specific properties, set Window to As Is; then change only properties
you want to update.

•

If you are updating a single property group of a paragraph format, choose Format > Paragraphs > Designer, and delete the tag from the Paragraph Tag box if the box is not empty.
Deleting the tag sets the box to As Is; FrameMaker does not change the tags of the formats
that you update. Then display the property group; change the properties as needed.

2)

Choose Global Update Options from the Commands pop-up menu.

3)

Click the current property group in the Use Properties area.

4)

Do one of the following:
•

76

To update all formats in the document, click All Paragraphs And Catalog Entries or All
Characters And Catalog Entries.

Page layout and templates

5)

•

To update all paragraphs or characters in the selection and all paragraphs or characters
with the same tags, click All Matching Tags In Selection.

•

To update formats with a specific tag, click All Tagged and choose a tag from the pop-up
menu.

Click Update All in the Designer dialog box.

Rename or delete formats
When designing a template or importing a catalog from a template, you sometimes must rename or
delete a format.
Deleting a format from a catalog does not affect any paragraphs or characters that have the same tag.
The paragraphs or characters simply have a tag that isn’t in the catalog.
1)

Choose a designer, and choose the format to rename or delete from the Paragraph Tag or Character Tag pop-up menu.
Do this even if the format you want is already displayed. This step ensures that the properties
do not include any format overrides or As Is settings.

2)

Do one of the following:
•

To rename, enter a new name in the Paragraph Tag or Character Tag box and click
Update All, and then OK.

•

To delete a format, click Delete, and then Select the format in the scroll list and click
Delete. Click Done.

•

To delete all unused formats from a catalog, click Delete. Then click Delete until all
formats have been removed, and click Done. Choose File > Utilities > Create And Apply
Formats, and then click Continue. Any paragraph or character format used in the document is added back to the catalog.

To avoid creating paragraphs for every override in your document, import the formats from
your template. Importing formats from a template overrides any changes to paragraph and
character tags and does not create additional tags in your document.
Apply formats
Paragraph formats apply at paragraph level, character formats at character or word level, and table
formats apply to complete tables.
•

Paragraph and table formats: Place the cursor inside the paragraph or the table, and select a
format from the catalog.

•

Character format: Select the text and click a format from the catalog.

77

Page layout and templates

3

Tips for creating new formats
When working from a stable template, you rarely have to create a format. If you’re designing a new
template or if the template you’re using is incomplete, you may have to create new formats. The
easiest way to create a format is to modify the properties of an existing format.
When you’re creating new formats, consider these suggestions:
•

Use consistent naming conventions for similar kinds of paragraphs or text items within a paragraph, such as Head1 and Head2.

•

To apply formats by using the keyboard, name the formats so that often-used ones are unique
or alphabetically first in their letter group, such as “H1 Head2” or “H2 Head2.”

•

Give each format a name that’s easy to remember, recognize, and type. If you assign a tag based
on its use and not its appearance (for example, Emphasis rather than Italics), you can later
change the format properties without having to change the tag.

•

Be aware of capitalization. Tags are case sensitive. Also, you sometimes want related tags to
appear together in the catalog, with names such as Body and BodyIndent.

•

If you have many formats, precede them with a period to avoid excessive scrolling in the catalogs; an initial period brings often-used formats to the top of the catalog. To force occasionally
used formats to the bottom of the catalog, precede them with a z or a tilde (~).

Specify formats for the paragraphs that follow
Well-designed templates often connect formats so that FrameMaker automatically applies a format
to the paragraph that follows the current one.
1)

Click in the paragraph.

2)

Display the Basic properties of the Paragraph Designer, and choose a tag from the Next Pgf Tag
pop-up menu. FrameMaker applies this tag when you press Return to create a paragraph.

3)

Click Apply To Selection.

Add graphics to paragraph formats
A paragraph format can include a line or other graphic that appears above or below a paragraph.
Perhaps all top-level headings in a document rest on a long thin line.

78

1)

On a reference page, draw or import the graphic in a reference frame, or locate one already
there that you want to use.

2)

Click in the paragraph you want to change. To place a line above or below several adjacent
paragraphs, select all the paragraphs.

Page layout and templates
3)

Display the Advanced properties of the Paragraph Designer, and choose the name of a reference frame from the Frame Above Pgf or from the Frame Below Pgf pop-up menu. All reference frames appear in the pop-up menus.

4)

Click Apply To Selection.

TIP:Because the Frame Above Pgf and the Frame Below Pgf settings can’t place graphics to the right or

left of a paragraph, you can’t use these settings to place boxes around text. Box text by using a single-cell
table with outside ruling.

Format catalog
FrameMaker offers enhanced features to manage and apply paragraph, character, and table formats.
This is possible from the respective catalog. A catalog shows all formats in the current document by
default. You can set which formats you want to see in the catalog. Catalogs also help in applying and
managing the formats.
FrameMaker marks the used formats in a catalog. The unused formats are unmarked. This usage
information is not updated as soon as you apply the formats in the document. Clicking Refresh
Catalog at the bottom of the catalog, updates the usage information. The latest usage information is
also updated when opening a document.
NOTE: Formats in use in the current document are marked in the catalog. Whereas the format applied

to your current selection is shown in the status bar.
Display formats
You can configure the formats that are visible in a catalog and their order too.
•

Open a (paragraph, character, or table) catalog and click Options.

•

Select one of the following

•

Show All, to see all available formats.

•

Show used before unused, to see used formats before unused formats in the catalog.

•

Show only used formats, to hide unused formats in the catalog, but retain them in the template.

•

Show only unused formats, to hide used formats in the catalog, but retain them in the template.

•

Delete all unused formats, to delete all unused formats from the template, without warning or
confirmation.

•

Customized List, to customize which formats you see and in what order you see them.

•

Format being used in the current document are marked in the catalog. While editing the document, the usage status might not get updated automatically. To refresh the list click Refresh
Catalog.

79

Page layout and templates

3

NOTE: The display options you set are workspace properties and are applicable to FrameMaker docu-

ments opened on your machine.
Delete formats
Formats can be deleted from respective catalogs.
•

Open the catalog if not already open.
–

Paragraph catalog from Format > Paragraphs > Catalog.

–

Character catalog from Format > Characters > Catalog.

–

Table catalog from Table > Format > Catalog.

•

Click Delete.

•

In the Delete Formats from Catalog window, select a format and delete it.

•

Click Done to delete formats from document or click Cancel to undo the operation.

Fonts

Replace fonts using the Fonts pod
You can use the Fonts pod to identify all the fonts used in an open document or all open documents.
The pod list area lists all the fonts used in a document. You can replace any font used in a document
using the fonts pod including missing fonts. The missing fonts are indicated by a red cross sign.
Fonts pod lists all the fonts used in open documents.

80

Page layout and templates
A. Select all open documents or currently open document. B. Display only missing fonts or all fonts
used in a document. C. Replace font to display the Replace Fonts pod. D. Refresh the list of fonts
displayed in the pod list area. E. Missing fonts indicated by a red cross sign.
To replace a missing font:
1)

Select a font from the list and click the Replace icon.

2)

From the Replace Font pod, select the new font from the Replace With list box and click Apply.
Replace fonts pod lists all the paragraphs in a document that use a selected font.

A. Name of the selected font. B. Replace With list box lists all the fonts installed on your
system. C. Locations list displays all the paragraphs in the document that use the selected font.
D. Refresh the locations list. E. Go To Location takes you to the location in the document that
uses the selected font.
Manual font changes
Format changes you make using the Format menu commands take effect immediately.
When changing font properties, keep in mind the following:
•

To remove other style properties, choose Plain.

•

If you change the font properties of selected text, those properties are retained when you later
update the properties of the entire paragraph.

•

You can change the font properties of text created with the Text Line tool as well as paragraph
text.

•

Do not use the Courier® font when Adobe® Type Manager® is turned off or not installed. If you
do use Courier without ATM, FrameMaker products do not accurately display the Courier
font.

81

Page layout and templates
•

3

If a font has more than one weight—for example, Helvetica® Condensed Bold and Helvetica
Condensed Black—the Format > Style submenu lists only Bold. To choose other weights, use
the Default Font properties of the Paragraph Designer or use the Character Designer instead.

Font changes using the designers
To change the default font properties of an entire paragraph, use the Paragraph Designer. The font
families and styles available depend on which fonts are installed.
To change specific text within a paragraph, select the text and use the Character Designer.
You’ve probably seen many of the settings in other word processors, but a few can be new to you.
Numeric Underlining
To use a single offset and thickness for an underline regardless of the character’s font or size,
choose Numeric Underlining. Regular and numeric underlining does not affect tab characters.
If you want the tab space to be underlined, format that tab stop so that it uses a nonbreaking
space as a leader.
Numeric and regular underlining

Change Bar
To display a change bar next to text, select Change Bar.
Color
To display the text in a different color, choose a color from the Color pop-up menu. If you
define your own colors, they appear in the pop-up menu.
Spread
To add or subtract space between characters, enter a percentage for Spread. Spread—also
called tracking—is expressed as a percentage of an em space. Normal spread is 0%.
-10% spread (top), 0% spread (center), 10% spread (bottom)

Stretch
To set the width of the character shapes, enter a percentage for Stretch.
Capitalization
To display all characters in uppercase but use slightly smaller capital letters for text that was in
lowercase, choose Small Caps.
82

Page layout and templates
Using a designer to apply a capitalization style to text changes only the appearance of the text
(for example, makes lowercase text appear in uppercase letters). To permanently change the
text itself, use the Capitalization dialog box to replace selected text with text that is all uppercase, all lowercase, or initial caps.
Language
To change the language associated with the text, choose from the Language pop-up menu. The
language you choose affects the text in system variables as well as both spell-checking and
hyphenation. Also, changing the language to None prevents the selected text from being
spell-checked.
Pair Kern
To adjust the space between two characters in the same word, select Pair Kern. The kerning
pairs that have been defined depend on the font.
Kerning pairs turned on and off

Tsume
To move a Japanese character closer to the characters next to it, select Tsume. The amount of
space a variable-width character, such as a parenthesis, can move is determined by the metrics
for that character.
Adjust superscripted, subscripted, and small cap text
Adjustments to the properties of subscript, superscript (including footnote references), and small
cap text apply to all such text in the document.
1)

In the Text Options dialog box, specify a size, offset, and stretch percentage.
When calculating the size and offset, FrameMaker multiplies the percentage you enter by the
point size of the affected characters. For example, a 40% superscript offset value raises a
10-point character 4 points.
The stretch percentage is the amount that characters are condensed or expanded.

2)

Click Apply.

Condense and expand characters
You can achieve some effects by stretching characters.

83

Page layout and templates

3

Text unchanged (top) and condensed 75% (bottom)

1)

Depending on whether you are changing the entire paragraph or specific text in the paragraph,
choose one of the following:
•

Default Font from the Properties pop-up menu in the Paragraph Designer.

•

Character Designer.

2)

Enter a percentage in the Stretch box. A value of 100% means that the width of characters is as
defined for the font. A value less than 100% condenses the width; a value greater than 100%
expands the width.

3)

Click Apply To Selection.
TIP:In Japanese documents, use a stretch value greater than 100 to simulate heitai (horizontally

stretched characters). Use a stretch value less than 100 and increase the point size of text to simulate chotai (vertically stretched characters).
You can also change the width of a text line by dragging to stretch the text.
1)

Select the text line you want to change, and then drag one of its handles until the text is
stretched to the shape you want. Dragging a corner handle changes the point size as well as the
character width. You can also select a grouped object that includes a text line.

Create or change combined fonts of Japanese and Western characters
In addition to containing the full Japanese syllabaria, Japanese fonts include a set of Western characters to facilitate entering non-Japanese characters and numbers. You can define your own
combined font—a font that uses a specified Western font with a specified Japanese font.
If you’re working on a system that supports Japanese text and if combined fonts are included as part
of a template, they are available to you automatically. (The specified fonts must be installed.) If your
system supports the typing of Japanese text in documents and dialog boxes, combined fonts appear
at the top of the font lists along with regular Western and Japanese ones.
FrameMaker supports Japanese single-byte, half-width katakana characters in combined fonts.
Changes to the combined fonts apply to the entire document.
1)

2)
84

In the Combined Fonts dialog box, do one of the following:
•

To create a new combined font, enter a name in the Combined Font Name box.

•

To change a combined font, select its name from the Combined Fonts list.

Do the following:

Page layout and templates
•

To specify the Japanese font, choose from the pop-up menu of font families in the Asian
Text area.

•

To specify the Western font, choose from the pop-up menu of font families in the
Western Text area.

•

To adjust the relative size and baseline offset of the Western text, enter values for Size and
Offset. The size and offset of the Western text are percentages of the Asian point size. Use
a negative offset to move the text below the baseline.

3)

Click Add or Change.

4)

Click Done.

NOTE:You can turn off the Allow Bolded And Obliqued Styles setting in the Asian Text area of the Edit

Combined Fonts dialog box so that bolding or italicizing the Western font does not automatically
enbold or italicize the Asian text.
1)

To copy a set of combined fonts, choose File > Import > Formats and select Combined Fonts.

Background color
You can highlight sections of a document by setting the background color of the parts of the document in the following scenarios:
•

Set background color of a specific part of text within a paragraph.
Text background color

•

Set the background color of the entire text of a paragraph.
Paragraph background color

•

Set the background color of the paragraph box that encloses the paragraph.

85

Page layout and templates

3

Paragraph box color

Set background color of text within a paragraph
Use this method to set a background color for some of the text in a paragraph.
1)

Select the text in a paragraph.

2)

Open the Character Designer.

3)

Select the Background Color check box.

4)

In the Background Color drop-down list, choose a color and click Apply.

The background color is set for only the selected text in the paragraph.
Set background color of entire paragraph text
1)

Place the cursor anywhere within the paragraph.

2)

Open the Paragraph Designer and go to the Default Font tab.

3)

Select the Background Color check box.

4)

In the Background Color drop-down list, choose a color and click Apply.

The background color is set for all the text in the paragraph.
Set background color of a paragraph box
1)

Place the cursor anywhere within the paragraph.

2)

Open the Paragraph Designer and go to the Advanced tab.

3)

In the Pgf Box drop-down list, choose a color and click Apply.

The background color is set for the entire box that surrounds a paragraph.
When you set the background color of the text in paragraph, the color spans the text of the paragraph. However, in the case of a paragraph box, the text spans the entire real estate of the paragraph
from the left margin to the right margin.

86

Page layout and templates

Indentation, alignment, and spacing

Change paragraph alignment
The alignment property of a paragraph determines how the paragraph is positioned between the left
and right indents, not between the edges of the text column.
1)

Do one of the following:
•

To use the ruler, drag the indent symbol to a new location on the ruler.

A. First indent B. Left indent C.Right indent

TIP:To align an indent with a ruler marking, turn on the snap grid (use Graphics > Snap).

When you drag an indent symbol, it snaps to locations corresponding to the snap grid.
•

To use an indent value, display the Basic properties of the Paragraph Designer. Enter the
indents you want in the First, Left, and Right boxes, and then click Apply To Selection.

•

Choose an alignment from the Alignment pop-up menu on the formatting bar or in the
Basic properties of the Paragraph Designer.
NOTE:If you use Shift+Enter or Shift+Return to insert a forced return within a fully justified

paragraph, the line that ends with the forced return is not justified.
Change tab stops
If you press Tab and the insertion point doesn’t move, a tab stop hasn’t been defined.
You can choose from four types of tab stops—left, center, right, and decimal.

A. Left tab stop B. Center tab stop C. Right tab stop D. Decimal tab stop

87

Page layout and templates

3

You can also specify a pattern of characters—a leader—to fill the space between a tab and the character following it. Typically, a leader is a series of periods. Tab leaders are useful in tables of contents
that have a wide gap between columns.
Change tabs in formatting bar
1)

Display the Paragraph Format toolbar. Only the tab stops common to all the selected paragraphs appear on the top ruler.

2)

Do one of the following:
•

To add a tab stop, click a tab stop symbol from Paragraph Format toolbar and click the
desired position below the top ruler.

•

To move a tab stop, drag it to a new position.

TIP:To align tab stops with ruler markings, turn on the snap grid (Graphics > Snap). When you

drag a tab symbol, it snaps to locations corresponding to the snap grid.
•

To add multiple tab stops at regular intervals, on the top ruler, double-click the existing
tab stop that you want to duplicate. Enter the interval between tabs in the Repeat Every
box and click Edit.

•

To change a tab stop, double-click it, enter a new tab position in the New Position box,
and choose a different alignment. The position is the distance from the left edge of the
column to the tab stop. Then click Edit. You can also drag a new tab stop on top of an
existing one on the ruler to replace it.

•

To delete a tab stop, drag it off the bottom of the top ruler.

•

To delete all tab stops, double-click a tab stop and click Delete All.

Change tabs in Paragraph Designer
1)

Display the Basic properties of the Paragraph Designer.

2)

In the Tab Stops area, create, edit, or delete, choosing the appropriate settings.

3)

Click Apply To Selection.

Define a leader or decimal tab character

88

1)

Double-click the tab stop on the ruler.

2)

Do one of the following:
•

In the Leader area of the dialog box, click one of the predefined tab leaders or enter your
own custom leader, and then click Edit.

•

To specify a decimal character—for example, a comma when you’re working with European decimals—enter the decimal character in the Align On box in the Alignment area
and click Edit.

Page layout and templates
Change paragraph and character spacing
Vertical spacing is the space between paragraphs and lines. Horizontal spacing is the space between
words and characters. Spacing properties go by different names in different contexts. The space
between characters is often called pair kerning; adjusting the letter spacing in a line is spread or
tracking; the line spacing of a paragraph— measured from the baseline of one line to the baseline of
the next—includes its leading.
Adjust vertical spacing
When adjusting vertical spacing, keep in mind the following:
•

If a paragraph falls at the top of a column, FrameMaker ignores the Space Above setting. If the
paragraph falls at the bottom of a column, FrameMaker ignores the Space Below setting.

•

When an anchored frame is positioned below the current line and its anchor symbol appears
in the last line of a paragraph, the space below the paragraph usually appears between the frame
and the next paragraph. If the frame is anchored in a straddle paragraph, the space below is
discarded. If the frame is a straddle frame but is not anchored in a straddle paragraph, the space
below appears between the anchor symbol and the frame.

•

In a multicolumn layout, you can also adjust vertical spacing in columns by vertically justifying, or feathering, the text in them.

Several properties affect the vertical spacing of a paragraph: the space above the paragraph, the space
below the paragraph, and the line spacing.
1)

Display the Basic properties of the Paragraph Designer and do one of the following:
•

Specify values for Space Above and Space Below. The space between paragraphs is determined by the Space Below setting of the first paragraph or the Space Above setting of the
second paragraph, whichever is larger.

•

Choose a type of line spacing from the Line Spacing pop-up menu, or enter a value in the
box.

2)

To allow extra space between lines to accommodate superscripts, subscripts, rubi text, and
larger font sizes that appear in the paragraph, turn off Fixed.

3)

Click Apply To Selection.

Adjust horizontal spacing
As FrameMaker fills a line of text, it adjusts the space between characters according to kerning and
tracking properties. The spacing between words is based on the following values, which are stored
as part of the paragraph format:
•

The minimum spacing is the smallest space allowed between words.

89

Page layout and templates

3

•

The maximum spacing is the largest space allowed between words before FrameMaker tries to
hyphenate words or add space between letters in justified paragraphs.

•

The optimum spacing is what FrameMaker tries to achieve.

These values are expressed as a percentage of the standard space character for the default font of a
paragraph. Values below 100% create tighter word spacing with a more justified look; values above
100% create looser spacing, with a more ragged right edge.
1)

To adjust the space between words, click a paragraph or select several paragraphs whose
spacing you want to change.

2)

Display the Advanced properties of the Paragraph Designer and specify the minimum,
optimum, and maximum space to allow between words.

3)

Click Apply To Selection.
NOTE:Lines of text in a justified paragraph can have more than the maximum space between

words if FrameMaker can’t fit a word on a line and can’t hyphenate it. To avoid this, add extra
space between characters in justified text by choosing Allow Automatic Letter Spacing in the
Word Spacing area.
4)

To apply pair kerning or spread, in the Character Designer, choose Pair Kern option or fill in
the Spread field.

Adjust spacing in Japanese documents
If your system supports the typing of Japanese text in documents and dialog boxes, you can adjust
the following spacing properties:
•

Special group of properties in the Paragraph Designer that controls some aspects of Japanese
character spacing.

•

Size, spacing, and alignment of rubi text throughout a document.

•

Spacing of variable-width Japanese characters through selection of the Tsume font property.

Adjust the space around characters and punctuation

90

1)

In the Paragraph Designer, display the Asian properties.

2)

Do the following:
•

To adjust the space between Japanese characters and Western ones, use the upper group
of boxes; to adjust the space between Japanese characters, use the lower group of boxes.
Enter minimum, maximum, and optimum percentages.

•

To determine the space between characters and special punctuation characters (yakumono), choose from the Punctuation pop-up menu. Squeeze As Necessary means that
space around punctuation is reduced only when special punctuation handling (kinsoku

Page layout and templates
shori) occurs. Never Squeeze means that no space adjustment is made around punctuation. Always Squeeze means that space is always reduced around punctuation.
•

To achieve a monospaced look in Japanese text, choose Never Squeeze from the Punctuation pop-up menu and turn off Tsume.

Adjust rubi text size, placement, and spacing
Rubi text is made up of small characters (usually kana) appearing above other text, called oyamoji.
Your settings affect rubi text throughout a document.
1)

In the Format > Document > Rubi Properties dialog box, choose a value from the Size pop-up
menu or enter a value in the box. The value you enter can be a percentage of the point size of
the underlying oyamoji, a point size, or any other unit of measurement, including Q units.

2)

Do the following:
•

To let rubi text overhang non-oyamoji text, click Let Rubi Overhang Surrounding Hiragana.

•

To remove preceding or trailing space when rubi text appears at the start or end of a line,
click Align All Characters At Line Boundaries.

3)

Click an option in the Rubi Alignment For Japanese Oyamoji or the Rubi Alignment For Other
Oyamoji area. The illustrations in the dialog box show how rubi text is spaced and aligned
when it’s above Japanese or non-Japanese characters and when its length is less than or greater
than the underlying text.

4)

Click Set.

Lists and autonumbering
You create numbered and bulleted lists by using paragraph formats that have an autonumber format
defined. As you add autonumbered paragraphs to your document, FrameMaker numbers them
appropriately and renumbers existing autonumbered paragraphs if necessary.
Autonumbered paragraphs are numbered consecutively in a text flow. If your document contains
several text flows, autonumbered paragraphs in each flow are independent of the others.
You define autonumbering in the Numbering properties of the Paragraph Designer. An autonumber
format does not have to specify paragraph numbering. When used without building blocks, it is
handy for inserting automatic text or symbols. An autonumber format can include a series label, a
counter, tabs, and any additional text you need.
Series label
Series labels identify different types of autonumber series within the same text flow. For
example, to number figures independently of tables or headings, you specify a different series
for each formatting item ((headings, figures, and tables).

91

Page layout and templates

3

On the other hand, table and figure numbers must all be in the same series to be based on
section numbers.
Counter
A counter is a placeholder (building block) that FrameMaker replaces with a number or letter
in the autonumber. For example, the counter  increments the paragraph’s number by 1;
if the paragraph is the second in a series, FrameMaker replaces  with the number 2. You
can use multiple counters in a format.
You can also add chapter <$chapnum> and volume <$volnum> building blocks in a format.
Tabs, text, and punctuation
An autonumber format can also include tabs, text, bullets, spaces, or punctuation.
Format text as numbered lists
Creating a numbered list sometimes involves formatting the first item in the list with a paragraph
format that resets the counter to 1, and then formatting the remaining items with a different format
that increments the counter. For example, perhaps you apply a Step1 format to the first item in a list
and then StepNext to the rest. The template also sometimes defines formats that let you apply a single
format to all items in a numbered list.
1)

Display the Numbering properties of the Paragraph Designer and enter a series label in the
Autonumber Format box if you need more than one autonumber series in the document.
A series label consists of any single printable character followed by a colon (for example, S:). If
you use a series label, it must appear at the beginning of the format.

92

2)

Enter any text you want to have appear automatically with the autonumber format. You can
enter tabs or counters from the Building Blocks scroll list. When you select an item, it appears
at the insertion point in the Autonumber Format box.

3)

Select a Character Format for the autonumber in the Character Format scroll list. If you don’t
specify a format, the autonumber appears in the paragraph’s default font.

4)

Choose a position for the autonumber from the Position pop-up menu. Autonumbers at the
end of paragraphs are rare except in equation formats.

5)

Click Apply To Selection.

6)

If you inserted a tab (\t) in step 2, set a corresponding tab stop for the paragraph format.

Page layout and templates
Format text as bulleted lists
In addition to the regular bullet symbol found in all text fonts, you can use any character in any
installed font, including a dingbat font such as Zapf Dingbats®.
1)

Click in a single paragraph or select adjacent paragraphs that you want to make into a bulleted
list.

2)

Display the Numbering properties of the Paragraph Designer and click the bullet and tab
symbols (\b and \t) in the Building Blocks scroll list.

3)

Click Apply To Selection.

4)

If you inserted a tab (\t) in step 1, set a corresponding tab stop for the paragraph format.

Specify a special bullet symbol
Before specifying a special bullet symbol, create a character format that uses the font of the bullet
symbol you want to use. For example, to use 9-point Zapf Dingbats, create a character format using
that font. Give the format a descriptive name such as BulletFont.
1)

Display the Numbering properties of the Paragraph Designer and enter the character corresponding to the bullet symbol you want in the Autonumber Format box.
For example, if you want a Zapf Dingbats square bullet, enter a lowercase n, which appears as
■ in that font. To find the character that corresponds to the bullet symbol you want, see the
character set for that font.

2)

Click the tab symbol (\t) in the Building Blocks scroll list or enter spaces.
NOTE:You sometimes must use special codes to enter characters such as nonbreaking spaces or em

spaces.
3)

In the Character Format scroll list, click the bullet character format that you created.

4)

Click Apply To Selection.

Remove autonumbering or a bullet from a paragraph
1)

Turn off Autonumber Format in the Numbering properties of the Paragraph Designer. Click
the option twice to turn off the setting; clicking it only once changes it to As Is.

2)

Click Apply To Selection.

Counters in autonumber formats
A counter consists of angle brackets (< >) that surround a display style and an increment value. The
Custom Autonumbering feature supports the Unicode text encoding standard.

93

Page layout and templates

3

A. Display style B. Increment value
To indicate the display style, use a counter with one of the following letters.

For this numbering style

Use

Numeric (1, 2, 3, …)

n

Lowercase Roman (i, ii, iii, iv, …)

r

Uppercase Roman (I, II, III, IV, …)

R

Lowercase alphabetic (a, b, c, …, aa)

a

Uppercase alphabetic (A, B, C, …, AA)

A

To indicate how an autonumber is incremented, use a counter with an increment value, as shown in
the following examples.

To

Use

Keep the value the same



Set the value to 1 or to any other number you enter after the equal sign



Increase the value of the counter by 1



Keep the value the same but not display it

<>

Reset to zero (or any other number) but not display it

< =0>

By default, each counter is initially set to zero. The counter can maintain its current value, be incremented by 1, or be reset to a different value. For example, use  in the format that resets
numbering to 1 at the beginning of a new set of numbered steps.
To keep the value the same but not display it, place a blank space between the angle brackets. If you
leave out the blank space, the angle brackets appear as part of the autonumber format.

94

Page layout and templates
Base autonumbering on book component numbers
You can insert <$volnum>, <$chapnum>, <$sectionnum>, or <$subsectionnum> building blocks in
paragraph formats. The book component numbers are determined by the settings in the Numbering
Properties dialog box.

Example
Volume 3
Chapter 3

Autonumber format
Volume <$volnum>
Chapter <$chapnum>

The following table illustrates how you can combine the chapter building block with other building
blocks:

Example
Section 1.1
Section 1.1.1
Figure 1-1
Table 1-1

Autonumber format
S:Section <$chapnum>.<=0>
S:Section <$chapnum>..
F:Figure <$chapnum>-
T:Table <$chapnum>-

Base autonumbering on section numbers
Table and figure numbers must all be in the same series for autonumbering in sections, as shown in
the following table:

Section number

Figure number

Table number

Section 1
1.1
1.2

Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2

Table 1-1
Table 1-2

Section 2
2.1
2.2

Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2

Table 2-1
Table 2-2

To achieve this type of numbering, construct autonumber formats in a single series using the same
series label for each format. The following table shows possible autonumber formats. The formats
are presented in a table so that you can clearly see the position of each counter in the string. Counter
position determines how the counter is incremented.

95

Page layout and templates

Paragraph format

3

Autonumber
format

SectionTitle

H:Section

<$chapnum>

< =0>

< =0>

< =0>

Head1

H:

<$chapnum>

.

<>

<>

FigureTitle

H:Figure

<$chapnum>

<>

-

<>

TableTitle

H:Table

<$chapnum>

<>

<>

-

Whenever a paragraph tagged SectionTitle occurs, the section number is incremented by 1, and the
remaining counter values are reset to zero. Each  counter in the remaining formats refer to a
different type of item, so they’re incremented independently.
The < > counters keep FrameMaker from resetting values back to zero.
Use multiple counters in an autonumber format
An autonumber format can contain more than one counter. For example, perhaps autonumbers for
a series of section and subsection titles each contain two counters.

These counters

In this format

Would appear as

<$chapnum>.

Head1

1.0

<$chapnum>.

Head2

1.1

<$chapnum>.

Head2

1.2

<$chapnum>.

Head1

2.0

The counters in each format are independent of each other. The position of a counter in the string
determines how it’s displayed and incremented. When incrementing a counter, FrameMaker bases
its value on the corresponding counter in the previous autonumber paragraph in the same flow.
The following example shows multiple counters in section titles and subtitles. The counter before the
period is incremented independently from the counter after the period.

96

Page layout and templates

Example
1.0 Getting started
1.1 Installing
1.2 Backing up
1.2.1 Errors
1.3 Entering data

Autonumber format
.\t
.\t
.\t
..\t
.\t

Tag
Head1
Head2
Head2
Head3
Head2

The following example demonstrates outline style autonumber formats.

Example
I Getting started
A Installing
B Backing up
II Entering data
A Opening a file
B Saving a file

Autonumber format
< =0>\t
< >\t
< >\t
< =0>\t
< >\t
< >\t

Tag
Head1
Head2
Head2
Head1
Head2
Head2

The autonumber in the heading Opening a file is reset to A; the second counter in the previous paragraph’s format resets the numbering to zero without displaying it, so  increments the counter
to 1 or A.
The < > counter in the Head2 format keeps the value of the first counter the same but doesn’t display
it. If the < > counter is not in that position, the  in the Head2 format refers to the first counter
(not the second), and FrameMaker produces the following result:
Incorrect outline style autonumber format

Reset a series
Some numbering series—such as a list of numbered steps—start at 1 every time they are used. You
can reset such a series in two ways.
The first example shows how to restart series numbering by using the  building block for the
first step in the series, and then using  for subsequent steps.

97

Page layout and templates

Example
Step 1. Unpack it.
Step 2. Back it up.
Step 3. Run setup.
Step 1. Save your file.

3

Autonumber format
S:Step .\t
S:Step .\t
S:Step .\t
S:Step .\t

Tag
Step1
StepNext
StepNext
Step1

The second example shows another way to reset the counter so that you don’t have to use a unique
format to start a numbered list. Instead, a paragraph that introduces the list uses a format that resets
the counter.

Example
To install the software:
Step 1. Unpack it.
Step 2. Back it up.
Step 3. Run setup.

Autonumber format
S:< =0>
S:Step .\t
S:Step .\t
S:Step .\t

Tag
StepIntro
Step
Step
Step

The < =0> counter in the StepIntro format resets the S series to zero but doesn’t display the number.
If a counter is incremented, any omitted counters in the series to the right of it are reset to zero. For
example, the following autonumber formats are equivalent:
S:< =0>\t
S:\t
About Japanese numbering options
The following counters in autonumber formats are allowed in Japanese text and with Japanese fonts.

Building block

98

Meaning



Fixed-width lowercase Roman
alphabet



Fixed-width uppercase Roman
alphabet



Fixed-width Arabic numbers

Characters, in this order

Page layout and templates

Building block

Meaning



Standard kanji numbering, where
double-digit numbers are made
up from the traditional kanji
characters for ten, one hundred,
and so on



Numbers used for street
addresses, phone numbers, postal
codes, and so on, where
double-digit numbers are made
up from the kanji characters for
zero through nine



Numbers used in financial or
banking contexts made up of
old-style kanji numerals



Hiragana characters in the
standard order



Katakana characters in the
standard order



Hiragana characters in the
literary order (rare)



Katakana characters in the
literary order (rare)

Characters, in this order

About RTL numbering options
The following counters in autonumber formats are allowed in RTL languages such as Arabic,
Hebrew, and Farsi. For details on the formats, see Counters in autonumber formats.

99

Page layout and templates
For the Farsi language script
•



•



•



•



•



•



For the Hebrew language script
•



•



•



•



•



•



For the Arabic language script

100

•



•



•



•



•



•



•



•



•



3

Page layout and templates

Master and reference pages

Body, master, and reference pages
FrameMaker documents contain three types of pages that help you set up your page layout:
•

Master pages specify the page layout and the background text for document pages (for
example, page headers and footers).

•

Reference pages can contain frequently used graphics, formatting information, hypertext
commands, mappings for HTML conversion, and boilerplate matter.

•

Body pages show the background text and graphics from the corresponding master page and
contain the document content.

A. Master pages: first and right B. Body pages: first chapter page and right page C. Reference page

101

Page layout and templates

3

Master pages
FrameMaker uses master pages to keep track of a document’s page layout. A double-sided document
contains at least two master pages, one for left pages and one for right pages. A single-sided document uses the right master page only. Documents can also contain custom master pages, which you
can use for special types of pages. You can also create layouts directly on body pages for
one-time-only use.
If your page layout is complex, or if you need to create design components such as page headers and
footers, work with the components directly on the master pages. You can draw or import graphics—
such as lines, boxes, or company logos—anywhere on a master page, as well as type text on them.
Graphics and text appear on the corresponding body pages exactly as they appear on the master
page, as part of the body page’s background.
Master page and body page

Master pages can contain the following types of text frames:
•

A template text frame contains a tagged text flow—a flow with a name. When you add a body
page, the template text frame is copied to the new body page. You then type the document’s
text in this text frame on the body page. You can type text in a template text frame on a master
page, but the text does not appear on body pages.

•

A background text frame contains an untagged text flow—a flow with no name. Its contents
appear on corresponding body pages, but you can edit them only on the master pages. Background text frames are typically used for page headers and footers.
Master page

A. Untagged background text frame B. Template text frame

102

Page layout and templates
When you add text and illustrations to your document on body pages, FrameMaker adds body pages
as necessary and automatically uses the page layout from the left or right master page.
On body pages, you type in a text frame copied from the template text frame.

Reference pages
You can use reference pages to store frequently used graphics that you want to position consistently
throughout a document, and then use the graphics on body pages where they are needed. If you place
a graphic in a reference frame—an unanchored graphic frame on a reference page—you can use the
frame as a property of a paragraph format. For example, to design a heading with a line below it,
draw the line in a reference frame, and then include the reference frame in the paragraph format of
the heading.
Reference page and body page

Reference pages can also hold boilerplate material or clip art that you can copy and paste on body
pages—for example, symbols for cautions and notes. And specialized reference pages can contain
hypertext commands, formatting information for generated lists and indexes, definitions of custom
math elements, and mappings for converting to XML and HTML.
A document normally contains at least one reference page. You can add your own graphics to an
existing reference page, and you can create additional reference pages (up to 100).

Create custom master pages
Documents may need body pages with layouts that differ from those of the left and right master
pages. For example, you can create a different look for the first page of a document, or you can
103

Page layout and templates

3

include a landscape page in a portrait document. For such cases, you create custom master pages. (A
document can contain up to 100 master pages.)
After you create the custom master page, change its column layout, and add background text and
graphics. You then assign the custom master page to one or more body pages.
Create a custom master page that is empty or based on another master page’s layout
1)

Display the master page that you want to use as a basis for the new master page.

2)

Choose Special > Add Master Page and enter a name for the new master page in the Name text
box.

3)

Do one of the following:

4)

•

To create a master page with a layout that matches the layout of an existing master page,
choose the master page from the Copy From Master Page pop-up menu.

•

To create an empty master page, click Empty.

Click Add.

Create a custom master page based on a body page’s layout
1)

Make the column layout changes you want on a body page.

2)

With the body page displayed, choose Format > Page Layout > New Master Page.

3)

Enter a name for the master page and click Create.

RELATED LINKS:
Assign master pages to body pages

Reorder, rotate, or delete custom master pages

Reorder custom master pages
When you reorder custom master pages, the Right and Left master pages always remain at the beginning.

104

1)

Open a master page, and then choose Format > Page Layout > Reorder Custom Master Pages.

2)

Select a master page in the Custom Master Pages list, and click Move Up or Move Down to
move the page accordingly.

3)

Click Set. If you were previously viewing a custom master page, note that a different master
page may now be visible.

Page layout and templates
Rotate a master page
You can create a custom master page that changes the orientation of a body page. For example, you
can create a rotated orientation for a body page with a wide table.
Right page uses a rotated master page.

1)

On a new master page, set up any text frames and background text and graphics that you want
to have the same orientation (unrotated) as headers and footers on the other master pages.

2)

Choose one of the Format > Customize Layout > Rotate Page commands. When FrameMaker
rotates the page, part of the page will probably be out of view. You can adjust the window size
to see as much of the page as possible.

3)

Create the text frames, background text, and background graphics that you want to display
rotated.

TIP:You can type in rotated text frames, or you can unrotate the page to make typing faster. To unro-

tate a page, choose Format > Customize Layout > Unrotate Page. When you’re finished, you can rotate
the page again.
RELATED LINKS:
Creating and modifying background text frames

Rename or delete a custom master page
1)

Display the master page, and choose Special > Delete Page.

NOTE:You cannot rename the master pages named Left and Right, and you cannot delete the left or

right master page or any master page currently assigned to a body page.

Assign master pages to body pages
You can assign a master page to a body page at any time. FrameMaker uses the template text frame
from the master page and displays background text and graphics.
You can also choose to assign no master page to a body page. Because it’s not associated with a
master page, this type of body page has no headers, footers, or other background text or graphics. (If
the body page contains a text frame, the text frame is unaffected.) For example, if each chapter in a
105

Page layout and templates

3

book must contain an even number of pages, and if the last page of a chapter contains no body text,
you may not want that page to use a master page, so that it will be blank.
Assign a different master page
1)

With a body page displayed, choose Format > Page Layout > Master Page Usage.

2)

In the Use Master Page area, do one of the following:

3)

4)

•

To assign the left or right master page, click Right (in a single-sided document) or
Right/Left (in a double-sided document).

•

To assign a custom master page, choose the page name from the Custom pop-up menu.

•

To assign no master page, choose None from the Custom pop-up menu.

In the Apply To area, do one of the following:
•

To apply the change to the current body page, click Current.

•

To apply the change to a range of pages, enter the starting and ending page numbers in
the Pages text boxes.

•

To apply the changes only to odd or even pages within a range, select Even or Odd.

•

To apply the changes only to pages within a range that currently use a particular master
page, choose a page from the pop-up menu in the Apply To area.

Click Apply.

NOTE:If the master page contains a template text flow not found on the body page, FrameMaker adds

the text frames that contain that flow to the body page. If the body page contains a flow not found on
the master page, FrameMaker leaves the text frames that contain that flow unchanged. This action
could result in overlapping text frames.
Assign a master page to pages with specified paragraph tags
You can assign master pages to body pages that contain specified paragraph tags. For example, you
may want all pages that include the Title paragraph tag to be formatted with a custom master page
called First.
You map the paragraph tags to the master pages using the Reference Pages mapping table. When you
choose the Apply Master Pages command, the master page will be applied to the body pages on
which the referenced paragraph tag appears.

106

Page layout and templates
In this example, the First master page will be applied to body pages containing Title paragraph tags.

1)

Choose View > Reference Pages.

2)

Click the Next Page button until the five-column UnstructMasterPageMaps table appears.
TIP:If the mapping table does not appear in the reference pages, choose Format > Page Layout >

Apply Master Pages.
3)

For Book Update (Yes Or No), type Yes or No to determine whether the specified master page
is applied when you choose Apply Master Pages from a book.

4)

Edit the mapping table by doing the following:

5)

•

Under the Paragraph Tag Name column heading, type the name of the paragraph tag to
which you want the master page to be applied. This column is required for master pages
to be applied. Spell the paragraph tag name correctly, using the same capitalization that
the paragraph tag uses.

•

Under the Right-Handed Master Page column heading, type the name of the master page
you want to apply. This column is required for master pages to be applied. The specified
master page is applied to all body pages, including left-handed pages in double-sided
documents on which the paragraph tags appear, unless you specify a different master
page under the Left-Handed Master Page column. Master page names are case-sensitive.

•

Under the Left-Handed Master Page column heading, type the name of the master page
that you want to apply to the left-handed body pages on which the paragraph tags appear
in double-sided documents. This column is optional.

•

Under the Range Indicator column heading, type Single to apply the master page only to
the body page on which each paragraph tag appears; type Span pages to apply the master
page to the entire span of pages to which the paragraph tag is applied; or type Until
changed to apply the master page to all pages, until the next body page with a different
paragraph tag listed in the mapping table is encountered. If this cell is blank, master pages
are applied to single pages.

•

Add notes to the Comments column. Text you type in this column does not affect how
master pages are applied in any way.

•

To map additional master pages to paragraph tags, add and fill out additional table rows.

When you are done, choose View > Body Pages.

107

Page layout and templates

3

6)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

7)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Apply Master Pages, and then click Yes to override manually
applied master pages.

Adobe FrameMaker searches each body page for the first occurrence of any paragraph tag specified
in the Master Page Maps table. When it finds text containing the specified paragraph tag, it applies
the specified master page.
Assign a master page to body pages of structured documents
To assign master pages to body pages containing elements in structured documents, you map the
elements to the master pages using the Reference Pages mapping table. When you choose Apply
Master Pages, the master page is applied to the body page on which the referenced element appears.
1)

In Structured FrameMaker, choose View > Reference Pages.

2)

Click the Next Page button until the eight-column StructMasterPageMaps table appears.
TIP:If you are working on a document created in a previous version of FrameMaker, choose

Format > Page Layout > Apply Master Pages, so that the mapping table appears in the reference
pages.

108

3)

To the right of Book Update (Yes Or No), type Yes or No to determine whether the specified
master page is applied when you choose Apply Master Pages from a book.

4)

Edit the mapping table by doing the following:
•

Under the Element/Paragraph Tag Name column heading, type a valid prefix (E: for
element tag, or P: for paragraph tag), followed by the name of the element or paragraph
tag to which you want the master page to be applied. If no prefix is applied, an element
tag is assumed. Spell the name correctly, using the same capitalization that the element
or paragraph tag uses. This column is required for master pages to be applied.

•

Under the Right-Handed Master Page column heading, type the name of the master page
you want to apply. The specified master page is applied to all body pages, including
left-handed pages in double-sided documents on which the elements or paragraph tags
appear, unless you specify a different master page under the Left-Handed Master Page
column. Master page names are case-sensitive. This column is required for master pages
to be applied.

•

Under the Left-Handed Master Page column heading, type the name of the master page
that you want to apply to the left-handed body pages on which the elements or paragraph
tags appear in double-sided documents. This column is optional.

•

Under Attribute Name, type a valid attribute name to further define the mapping
context.

•

Under Attribute Value, type a valid attribute value to further define the mapping context.

Page layout and templates
•

Under Context, type a value for an element’s context label to further define the mapping
context.

•

Under the Range Indicator heading, type Single to apply the master page only to the body
page on which each element or paragraph tag appears; type Span pages to apply the
master page to the entire span of pages to which the element or paragraph tag is applied;
or type Until changed to apply the master page to all pages until the next body page with
a different element or paragraph tag listed in the mapping table is encountered. If this cell
is blank, master pages are applied to single pages.

•

Add notes to the Comments column. Text you type in this column does not affect how
master pages are applied in any way.

•

To map additional master pages to elements or paragraph tags, add and fill out additional
table rows.

5)

Choose View > Body Pages.

6)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

7)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Apply Master Pages, and then click Yes to override manually
applied master pages.

FrameMaker searches each body page for the first occurrence of any element or paragraph tag specified in the Master Page Maps table. When it finds text containing the specified element or paragraph
tag, it applies the specified master page.

Display master pages
When working with master pages, you move back and forth between them and the body pages.
When a master page is visible, its name and the number of master pages in the document appear in
the Page Status area of the status bar.
Page Status area of status bar

1)

Choose View > Master Pages. The master page used by the current body page appears, with the
text frame and column borders visible.

View other master pages when a master page is visible
1)

Do one of the following:
•

Click the Next Page or Previous Page button.

•

Press the Page Up or Page Down key.

•

Use the scroll bar.

109

Page layout and templates

3

Return to body pages while master pages are visible
1)

Choose View > Body Pages. The most recently displayed body page appears. If FrameMaker
detects any layout overrides on body pages, an alert message asks how you want to handle
them.

RELATED LINKS:
About layout overrides

View, create, and delete reference pages

Display reference pages
1)

Choose View > Reference Pages. The name of the current reference page appears in the Page
Status area of the status bar.
Page Status area

If the document doesn’t contain any reference pages, the Add Reference Page dialog box
appears. Create the first reference page by entering a page name and clicking Add.
View other reference pages when a reference page is visible
•

Click the Next Page or Previous Page button.

•

Press the Page Up or Page Down key.

•

Use the scroll bar.

Create a reference page

110

1)

Display reference pages and choose Special > Add Reference Page.

2)

Enter a name for the reference page and click Add.

Page layout and templates
Return to body pages
1)

Choose View > Body Pages. The most recently displayed body page appears.

Rename or delete a reference page
You can rename a reference page—for example, to avoid overwriting the reference page when you
import reference pages from a template that contains a reference page with the same name.
If you delete a reference page that contains a graphic used in a paragraph format, the graphic no
longer appears in paragraphs using that format. When this happens, the Frame Above or the Frame
Below pop-up menu in the Advanced properties of the Paragraph Designer is set to As Is for the
paragraphs.
1)

Display the reference page and do one of the following:
•

To rename the page, click the page name in the status bar, and type the new name. Click
Set.

•

To delete the page, choose Special > Delete Page.

Use reference frames on reference pages
You can use a graphic as part of a paragraph format if you have placed the graphic in a reference
frame on a reference page.
Graphics in reference frames

When you select a reference frame on a reference page, its name appears in the status bar after the
word Frame.

111

Page layout and templates

3

Create a reference frame on a reference page
1)

Click the Graphic Frame tool
a square frame, Shift-drag.

on the Tools pod, and then drag to draw the frame. To draw

2)

Enter a name in the Name text box and click Set. Use a short, descriptive name you can recognize later when the name appears in the Frame Above and the Frame Below pop-up menus in
the Advanced properties of the Paragraph Designer.

3)

Put a graphic in the frame. You can draw the graphic, import a graphic file, or combine drawn
and imported graphics.

4)

Adjust the frame’s size and shape if necessary. When you use a reference frame above or below
a paragraph on a body page, the whole frame—not just the graphic inside it—appears on the
body page. The height of the frame affects the spacing of text above and below the frame.

5)

Use the Text Line tool to type the frame’s name above the frame. Typing the name helps you
identify the frame when you view the reference page. It does not rename the reference frame.

Rename a reference frame
1)

Select the reference frame and click the frame’s name in the status bar.

2)

Enter the new name and click Set. You should also type the new name in the text line above the
reference frame. If you rename a reference frame used in a paragraph format, you need to
update the format so that it uses the new frame name.

Change other properties of a reference frame
1)

Select the frame and use either Graphics > Object Properties or the options on the Tools pod.

Set up boilerplate graphics on reference pages
You can set up boilerplate graphics—for example, margin symbols—in anchored frames on a reference page. Then you can copy the anchored frames to body pages. When you do this, the graphics
appear correctly positioned in their anchored frames.

112

Page layout and templates
You can copy and paste boilerplate graphics onto body pages.

You can also place graphics directly on reference pages and then copy and paste them anywhere on
body pages.
1)

Create a reference page with the same column layout as the body page on which you want to
display the graphic. This ensures that the graphic is positioned correctly when you copy it to
body pages. To set up the column layout, you can copy the text frame from a body page and
paste it on the reference page.
On the reference page, set up the anchored frame exactly as you want it to appear on body
pages.

2)

Draw the graphic in the anchored frame, or paste or import it into the frame. You may want to
add some text outside the anchored frame to identify the graphic. For example, in the illustration, Caution Symbol identifies the graphic.

Page layouts
You can make changes to a document’s basic page layout directly from a body page. FrameMaker
automatically updates both the left and right master pages, and updates the layout of any body pages
that use those master pages. If any of these body pages contain layout overrides, you are asked to
confirm that you want to make the updates.
If your document uses another master page—for example, for the first page of the document—you
must make any layout changes on that master page.

Change page size
1)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Page Size.

3)

Do one of the following:

113

Page layout and templates

4)

3

•

Choose a standard size from the Page Size pop-up menu. The correct dimensions appear
in the Width and Height text boxes.

•

Enter dimensions in the Width and Height text boxes. Custom appears in the pop-up
menu. The custom page size you specify can be small, depending on the document’s
margin settings, or as large as 216 inches by 216 inches (approximately 548 centimeters
by 548 centimeters).

Click Set.

NOTE:If the document contains custom master pages, FrameMaker prevents change to a page size that

cannot accommodate the text frames on those master pages.

Change pagination
You can change a single-sided document to double-sided documents or the reverse. When you set
up a double-sided document, you specify whether the first page is a left or a right page.
1)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Pagination.

3)

Select one of the options in the Pagination area. If you select Double Sided, also specify whether
the first page is a left or right page. If you are applying pagination in a book, you can choose
Read from File to use the page side specified in the file, or you can choose Next Available Side
to avoid a blank page.
Depending on which option you selected, a blank page may be added to the previous file in the
book so that the document can start on the page you specified.

4)

Click Set. If the document contains custom master pages or page layout overrides, an alert
message asks how you want to proceed.

Add or delete empty pages
You can specify that you want a document to have an even or odd number of pages. If necessary,
FrameMaker adds a blank page at the end of the document to achieve the correct pagination.
Conversely, a document may contain unwanted blank pages at the end, left there because you deleted
or reworked text. You can tell FrameMaker to delete these empty pages whenever you save or print
the document.
FrameMaker deletes a blank page only if it uses the left or right master page, doesn’t contain the start
of a flow, and has no layout overrides. FrameMaker doesn’t delete a page if it contains an empty paragraph but is otherwise blank.

114

Page layout and templates
If you use the document window to change the pagination of a document that is part of a book, the
settings may be overridden when you update the book. You can make sure that the book pagination
is correct by changing a document’s setup from the book window.
1)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Pagination.

3)

From the Before Saving & Printing pop-up menu, choose an option and click Set.

If blank pages are not added or deleted as expected, make sure that all pages in the document are auto
connected.
RELATED LINKS:
About layout overrides

Change page margins and number of columns
The margin is the distance between the page edge and the text frame. For a single-sided document,
you set margins for the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the text frame. For a double-sided document, you set the top, bottom, inside, and outside margins for a symmetrical look.
To set up asymmetrical left and right margins, you change the text frames directly on the master
pages. For example, you could make the text frames on both the left and right pages appear on the
right side of the page, leaving an area of white space on the left.
You can divide a text frame into two or more equally spaced columns of equal widths. To create a
multicolumn layout with unequal column widths or gaps, use one text frame for each column of text
and position the text frames one by one. Draw the text frames or set up one text frame the way you
want it and then duplicate it.
1)

Place the insertion point in the main text flow or click in the page margin. If a book window is
active, select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Column Layout.
If the layout is asymmetrical (for example, with a different number of columns, or a different
inside or outside margin on the left and right master pages), an alert message asks whether you
want to proceed. To retain the asymmetry, change the layout directly on the master pages.

3)

To change the margins, enter the values in the Margins area. The margins and the gap (space)
between columns determine the individual column width.

4)

To change the number of columns or the gap between columns, enter new values in the
Columns area.
All columns will be the same width and will be separated by a uniform gap.

115

Page layout and templates
5)

3

Click Update Entire Flow. If the new column width is too narrow to accommodate some
anchored frames or tables in the document, an alert message asks whether you want to
proceed. If you click OK, you can manually resize the tables and frames.

RELATED LINKS:
Changing page layout on specific pages
Add a template text frame on a master page
Adding text frames on body pages

Headers, footers, and other background text
You set up headers and footers by displaying master pages and typing text in background text
frames. The contents of background text frames appear on body pages, but you can only edit them
on master pages. The headers and footers might include the page number, date, chapter number and
title, section number and title, author, revision number, and draft release (such as preliminary and
final).
Header and footer text frames on master page

You create and edit header and footer text as you do any other paragraph text. You can apply paragraph and character formats, add and move tab stops, and add graphics such as a line above or below
the text. In addition, you can add system variables for information such as the page number or the
current date, and you can change the size and placement of the header and footer text frames. When
you modify these text frames on a master page, FrameMaker automatically updates any body pages
that use that master page.
You can also add other background text on master pages. For example, in the FrameMaker fax
template, the informational headings are in a background text frame on the master page.

116

Page layout and templates
Background text frames

A. Informational headings in background text frames B. Template text frame

RELATED LINKS:
Entering header or footer information

Creating and modifying background text frames
When you create a new, blank document, FrameMaker creates background text frames for headers
and footers on the left and right master pages. To make it easy to add centered and right-aligned
information in headers and footers, FrameMaker automatically adds center and right tab stops at the
center of the text frame and at the right margin. You can draw background text frames for additional
header and footer information or for other background text.
NOTE:You can create single lines of background text by using the Text Line tool, but you can’t apply
paragraph formats to the text or insert variables in it.

Add a background text frame on a master page
1)

Draw the text frame by using the Text Frame tool.

2)

In the Add New Text Frame dialog box, click Background Text and click Add. The new text
frame, like all text frames for background text on master pages, is untagged.

3)

Double-click in the text frame to place the insertion point, and then insert the header, footer,
or other background text.

Resize or move a background text frame
1)

Select the text frame by Control-clicking the text frame.

2)

Do any of the following:
•

To resize the text frame, drag a handle.

•

To move the text frame, drag its border (not a handle).

117

Page layout and templates

3

Entering header or footer information
You can create simple headers and footers by typing text in the header and footer text frames on the
master pages. In addition, you can specify items such as the current chapter and page numbers, the
document’s total page count, and the current date. FrameMaker displays a system variable in the
header or footer on the master page and replaces it with the correct value on each body page that uses
that master page.
You can also create running headers and footers in which the text changes from page to page. In the
following figure, the running header contains the current section heading; the footer contains the
page number and some text typed directly into the background text frame.
Running headers and footers

To create running headers and footers, you insert running header/footer variables in background
text frames on master pages.
Enter text, page numbers, dates, and other information
1)

On a master page, click in the header or footer where you want to add information.

2)

Do any of the following:
•

To insert static text, type the text.

•

To insert system variables, access the Variables pod and double-click the variable name
in the Variables scroll list. You can insert any system variable, such as:

Numbering for book components
Volume Number, Chapter Number, Section Number, or Sub Section Number
Page numbers
Current Page # or Page Count
Date information
Current Date (Long), Current Date (Short), Modification Date (Long), Modification Date
(Short), Creation Date (Long), or Creation Date (Short)
Other variables
Chapter Title Name, Filename (Long), Filename (Short), Table Continuation, or Table Sheet
118

Page layout and templates
•

To insert user variables, access the Variables pod and double-click the variable name (if
already defined) in the Variables scroll list.

TIP:To add centered information in headers and footers, press Tab to move the insertion point to

the centered tab stop. To add right-aligned information, press Tab again to move the insertion
point to the right-aligned tab stop.
RELATED LINKS:
Variables

Changing page layout on specific pages
You can create an asymmetrical layout by adding or changing text frames directly on the master
pages. For example, you may want the left margin to be wider than the right on both left and right
pages. Or you may want a single-column layout on the left page and a two-column layout on the
right. You can even create a layout that contains columns with different widths or with different gaps
by using several text frames on a page—one text frame for each column.
About layout overrides
When you make changes on a master page, FrameMaker automatically updates all body pages using
that master page. When you make layout changes on a body page (for example, by changing the
number of columns, the gap between columns, or the margins), you create an override to its master
page’s layout. You can then do any of the following:
•

Update the master page and all corresponding body pages with your changes.

•

Create a master page based on the body page changes.

•

Do neither of the above, leaving the override as a one-time-only page layout.

RELATED LINKS:
Updating body and master page layouts
Create custom master pages
Creating one-time-only page layouts

Change margins and column layout on specific pages
The following steps always produce either a single-column layout or a multicolumn layout with
equal-width columns.
If you want to create a multicolumn layout with unequal column widths or gaps, use one text frame
for each column, and position the text frames one by one.
1)

Select the text frame whose margins you want to change by Control-clicking the frame.

2)

Choose Format > Customize Layout > Customize Text Frame.

119

Page layout and templates
3)

4)

3

Do the following:
•

To change the margins, specify the new size and position in the Unrotated Size and Offset
From areas. The Offset From Top and Offset From Left options specify the top and left
margins. The bottom and right margins are then determined by the text frame’s width
and height.

•

To change the number of columns or the gap between columns, change the values in the
Columns area.

Click Set.

TIP:Another way to change the margins is to select a text frame and then drag a resize handle. When

you resize a multicolumn text frame, the column widths change to fit within the text frame, but the
column gap remains the same.
RELATED LINKS:
Add a template text frame on a master page
Adding text frames on body pages

Add a template text frame on a master page
For a master page to contain unequal-width columns of text, or to set up the layout for a newsletter
or other document in which the articles don’t flow continuously from the first page to the last, you
use multiple text frames—one for each column. For example, for a page with two unequal-width
columns, you would add a second template text frame. You can add a template text frame by drawing
it or by duplicating an existing one.
1)

To draw the text frame, use the Place A Text Frame tool on the Graphics Toolbar. To draw
more than one text frame, draw them in the order you want them connected.

2)

In the Add New Text Frame dialog box, click Template For Body Page Text Frame, and choose
a tag from the Flow Tag pop-up menu. Choose the current flow tag, unless you’re setting up a
text frame for a different flow in a multiflow document.

3)

In the Columns area, specify the number of columns in the text frame and (if it’s more than 1)
the gap between adjacent columns. If you’re setting up a layout with unequal-width columns,
set the number of columns to 1, because you use a separate text frame for each column.

4)

Click Add.

5)

Move the text frame as needed.

TIP:To copy an existing text frame, select the frame, choose Edit > Copy, and then choose Edit > Paste.

FrameMaker copies the text frame, its contents, and its properties (including the flow tag).

120

Page layout and templates
Adding text frames on body pages
When you draw a text frame on a body page, you are prompted for the number of columns and the
gap between them. However, FrameMaker does not assign a flow tag and does not connect the text
frame to existing text frames on the page. To use the new text frame as part of the document’s text
flow, connect it to the flow. If the new text frame is the first one in the flow, also select Autoconnect
so that new pages are automatically added as needed.
RELATED LINKS:
Connect text frames

Updating body and master page layouts
You can change template text frames on more than one master page and then update all corresponding body pages in one step. However, if you make column layout changes on a body page, you
must update the corresponding master page before you can update the other body pages that use that
master page.
Before FrameMaker updates body pages, it checks whether any body pages have column layouts that
override their master page. If any pages contain layout overrides, you specify whether to keep the
overrides.
Update body pages with master page changes
1)

After making layout changes on master pages, display body pages.

2)

If FrameMaker displays an alert message, specify whether to keep or remove layout overrides,
and then click Continue. If you keep layout overrides, FrameMaker updates those body pages
with the master page’s background text and graphics, but does not update the template text
frames.

Update a master page with body page changes
1)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Update Column Layout. A message asks you to confirm the
master page and body pages that are to be updated.

2)

Click Update.

3)

If FrameMaker displays an alert message, specify whether to keep or remove layout overrides
on the pages being updated, and then click Continue.

RELATED LINKS:
About layout overrides

121

Page layout and templates

3

Creating one-time-only page layouts
You may need to change the layout of only one body page in a document. For example, you can make
a text frame longer to fit one more line of text on the page, or shrink a text frame to make room for
a graphic placed directly on the body page. When you change the column layout of a body page
without updating the master page, you create a layout override.
RELATED LINKS:
Change margins and column layout on specific pages
Adding text frames on body pages

Align text across columns

Balance text across columns
In a layout that uses a multicolumn text frame, you can balance the text across columns that aren’t
full of text—for example, columns on partly empty pages that precede forced page breaks, and
columns on the last page of a document. You can balance text across columns throughout a text flow
or in an individual text frame.
Balancing off and on

Balance text across columns throughout a text flow
1)

If a document window is active, place the insertion point in the main text flow or click in the
page margin. If a book window is active, select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Column Layout.

3)

Select Balance Columns and click Update Entire Flow.

Balance text across columns in a single text frame
1)

Click in the text frame and choose Format > Customize Layout > Customize Text Frame.
Select Balance Columns and click Set.

122

Page layout and templates
Feather text to the bottom of text frames
When FrameMaker feathers text, it first adds space between paragraphs, up to a limit that you set. If
more adjustment is necessary, it adds space between lines, up to another limit that you set.
FrameMaker does not feather the text in a text frame in which text runs around graphics.
Before and after feathering

In a multicolumn text frame that contains straddles—paragraphs, tables, or anchored frames—
FrameMaker adds vertical space to align the last baselines of text in adjacent columns above each
straddle.
Before and after feathering with straddling

When text is feathered, the display of pages may be slower. For this reason, you may want to feather
text only after you finish editing a document.
1)

If a document window is active, place the insertion point in the main text flow. If a book
window is active, select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose Format > Page Layout > Line Layout.

3)

Select Feather, and enter the maximum amount of space FrameMaker can add between lines
(Maximum Interline Padding) and between paragraphs (Maximum Inter-Pgf Padding).
FrameMaker will not exceed the padding limits you set. If it’s not possible to feather text in a
column without exceeding the limits, FrameMaker does not feather text in that column.

4)

Click Update Flow.

NOTE:Feathering leaves room for the largest possible descender in the largest font size used in the line,

even if no character with such a descender actually appears. If the last line in a column seems too high,
123

Page layout and templates

3

check to see whether the column contains a nonprinting character (such as an anchor symbol) in a font
that’s larger than that of the surrounding text.
Synchronizing baselines
When you synchronize (align) text in a flow, FrameMaker creates an invisible grid in each text frame
and aligns the baseline of the first line of each specified paragraph to the grid. FrameMaker also
aligns the first line after an anchored frame and tries to align the first line in each column.
NOTE:If feathering and synchronization are both on for a flow, feathering takes precedence over

synchronization. However, the first lines in the columns are synchronized with each other.
Before and after synchronizing

Because headings in large fonts often appear at the tops of columns, you can specify a first-line
synchronization limit. This limit controls whether the baseline of a heading is placed on the first grid
line when the heading falls at the top of a column, even when the heading’s default font is larger than
the grid can accommodate. To place the baseline of a heading on the first grid line, FrameMaker lets
the heading extend above the top of the column as shown in the illustration. FrameMaker does not
synchronize font sizes larger than the limit you set.
Synchronize baselines across columns

124

1)

Check the paragraph formats of the paragraph types you want to synchronize to make sure
they all have the same default font size and line spacing. Fixed line spacing should be on.

2)

Click in the flow you want to synchronize (or select the documents in the book that you want
to affect) and choose Format > Page Layout > Line Layout.

3)

Select Baseline Synchronization and turn off Feather.

4)

In the Synchronization area, enter the line spacing you want to use for the text frame grid in
the Synchronize Pgf’s With Line Spacing Of text box. Use the same line spacing as in the paragraphs you want to synchronize. Otherwise, FrameMaker will not synchronize the paragraphs
with the text frame grid.

5)

In the First-Line Synchronization Limit text box, enter the largest font size to align at the top
of a column. For example, suppose the line spacing for body paragraphs is 12 points, the
column grid is 12 points, and the headings are 18 points. If you want the headings to be aligned
when they appear at the top of a column, specify 18 as the first-line limit.

Page layout and templates
6)

Click Update Flow. As no descenders appear above the first line in a column, the first grid line
is offset from the top of the column a distance equaling two-thirds of the specified line spacing.

Synchronize baselines in adjacent text frames
If the tops of adjacent text frames start at different positions on a page, you may need to adjust their
tops to line up their grids.
1)

Line up the grids by resizing adjacent text frames so that the distance between their tops is
evenly divisible by the grid. For example, if the grid is 12 points, you can start a text frame 144
points (12 times 12 points) from the top of an adjacent text frame.

A. Grid spacing B. Distance evenly divisible by the grid
TIP:Use the snap grid to correctly position the text frames. To do so, specify a snap grid equal to

the text frame grid. Then resize the text frames until their tops snap to the grid.

Multiflow documents
A document can have separate text flows, each with its own text frame connections. For example, a
bilingual document may contain side-by-side translations of the same text.
When a text frame fills in a multiflow document, you can tell FrameMaker not to add a new page.
That way, you can add pages yourself and control the connections. Because each flow’s autonumbering is independent of the numbering in other flows, you can maintain separately numbered lists,
headings, and figure titles for each flow.

Set up a multiflow document

125

Page layout and templates

3

About text flows and flow tags
A text flow is a series of connected text frames through which the text flows in a document. Most
documents have a single text flow, from the first page to the last, in which FrameMaker handles the
text frame connections automatically. You make the text frame connections yourself only for documents in which you need to weave several text flows together—for example, with a newsletter in
which you need to continue a front-page article on the back page, skipping over other articles on the
intervening pages.
The current text frame’s flow tag appears in the Tag area of the status bar.
Tag area of status bar

Set up a side-by-side flow
You set up a document with side-by-side text flows by laying out and connecting the text frames on
the master pages. Because the text frame connections are the same throughout the document, you
usually don’t need to make further changes on the body pages.
1)

Set up the flows on one of the master pages. Use a text frame for each flow and assign a different
flow tag to each text frame. Make sure that Autoconnect is on for each flow so that
FrameMaker adds a new body page whenever text reaches the end of one of the flows.
Left and right master pages for a side-by-side flow

2)

Repeat the previous step for the remaining master pages. All master pages should have the
same flow tags. Otherwise, FrameMaker will not alternate properly between the left and right
master pages when adding body pages.
IMPORTANT:To create a new body page correctly when text reaches the bottom of a text frame,

the appropriate left or right master page must contain all of the flow tags on the current body
page. If any flow tag is missing, FrameMaker creates the new page with the current body page’s
master page instead.
3)

Update the body pages with the master page changes by displaying body pages.

RELATED LINKS:
Add a template text frame on a master page

126

Page layout and templates
Change a flow’s tag or Autoconnect setting

Set up a flow for a newsletter or magazine
You set up a newsletter or magazine that requires nonparallel, multiple flows by establishing a
column layout on the master pages. However, the master pages act only as the basic layout grid. You
resize, delete, connect, and disconnect the text frames on the body pages until they look right. This
approach gives you the greatest flexibility in determining the way text flows through the document.
NOTE:If you are creating a newsletter or magazine that has articles that flow consecutively from the first

page to the last, you do not need to use the techniques described here. Instead, you can use a single text
flow. You can create special effects by making text run around graphics, and by making paragraphs,
tables, and frames straddle columns. For an example of this technique, see the newsletter template
provided with FrameMaker.
1)

Decide on the number of columns, and place that number of single-column text frames on
each master page. All of the text frames should be in the same flow. You can use these text
frames as the layout grid within which you’ll have text flow.
First master page

Left and right master pages with the same flow

2)

Turn off Autoconnect so that FrameMaker will not automatically add pages.

3)

Update body pages with the master page changes by displaying body pages.

4)

On each body page, resize, disconnect, and connect text frames as necessary. Don’t update the
master pages as you make changes on the body pages.

127

Page layout and templates

3

5)

To synchronize text baselines in the newsletter, make sure that the text frames are placed
appropriately. If the document contains several text flows, synchronize baselines for each flow.

6)

Manually create new disconnected body pages as necessary.

7)

Connect text frames between pages as necessary.

RELATED LINKS:
Add a template text frame on a master page

Control the flow of text
A flow’s basic properties are its Autoconnect setting and its flow tag. In a document with one flow
or parallel flows, Autoconnect is usually on to tell FrameMaker to add a new page whenever the
flow’s text frames are full. The new page takes the column layout of the appropriate master page (left
or right), and the text frames on the new page are automatically connected to the text frames on the
original pages.
When working on a document with nonparallel, multiple flows, you usually turn off Autoconnect.
This allows you to add a new, disconnected body page wherever you want, and to control the
connections between it and existing pages. If Autoconnect is off, and if the flow contains more text
than it can hold in its text frames, the text overflows at the end of the last text frame in the flow. The
bottom border of an overflowing text frame appears as a solid line when borders are visible.
Overflowing text frame

If you try to type in an overflowing text frame, you hear a beep. Overflowing text is not deleted; it is
hidden from view. As soon as you connect the overflowing text frame to another text frame, the
hidden text reappears in the next text frame.
If you need to assign a flow tag (for example, when creating side-by-side text flows), you can do so
at any time. (In a new, blank document, the main flow is tagged A.) You need to assign a tag only
once for a flow. After that, connecting a text frame to the flow assigns the tag to the text frame. If you
change the flow tag or the Autoconnect setting in one text frame in a flow, the change is made to the
entire flow.

128

Page layout and templates
Change a flow’s tag or Autoconnect setting
You normally change flow tags and the Autoconnect setting on master pages. If two text frames are
connected, you must disconnect them before you can change one of their flow tags.
1)

Click in a text frame in the flow.

2)

Choose Format > Customize Layout > Customize Text Frame.

3)

Enter a tag for the flow in the Flow Tag text box. You should keep flow tags short so that they
do not obscure other information in the Tag area of the status bar. You cannot assign a tag that
is already used on the current page.
NOTE:If you want two text frames on a page to have the same flow tag, connect the text frames.

4)

If you want FrameMaker to add a new page when you fill the last column on a page, select
Autoconnect.

5)

Click Set.

RELATED LINKS:
Connect text frames
Disconnect text frames

Add a new, disconnected page
In documents with one main flow or two parallel flows, you normally don’t add disconnected body
pages; you let FrameMaker add connected pages automatically when necessary. In a multiflow document in which Autoconnect is off, or in other specialized documents, you can add new, disconnected
body pages. When the text reaches the end of a text frame, you add a new page and connect the text
frames.
1)

From a body page, choose Special > Add Disconnected Pages.

2)

Choose the location and number of pages you want to add.

3)

Choose a master page from the Use Master Page pop-up menu and click Add.

Delete disconnected pages
When you delete disconnected pages in a multiflow document, FrameMaker also deletes the pages’
contents.
1)

Click in a page you want to delete and choose Special > Delete Pages.

2)

Specify the first and last disconnected pages you want to delete and click Delete. If you want to
delete only one page, enter its page number in both text boxes.

129

Page layout and templates

3

Connect text frames
When two text frames are connected, the text flows from the end of the first text frame to the beginning of the second. You can connect a text frame on a master page to any other text frame on the
same master page, and you can connect a text frame on a body page to any text frame on any body
page. You can also connect a text frame in the middle of a flow.
When you connect two text frames, FrameMaker assigns the first text frame’s flow tag to the second
frame. If the first text frame is untagged, the second frame’s tag is used. That way, all connected text
frames belong to the same flow and have the same tag. If the first text frame contains overflowing
text, the text flows into the second frame when you make the connection.
1)

Select the two text frames in the order in which you want text to flow. To select the text frames,
Control-click the text frames.
If the text frames are on different pages, the first frame is deselected when you select the second
one, but FrameMaker keeps track of the first selection.
NOTE:To add a text frame to the middle of a flow, first select the text frame you want to add, and

then select the frame that should follow it.
2)

Choose Format > Customize Layout > Connect Text Frames. If the first text frame you selected
isn’t on a page that’s currently visible, an alert message asks whether you want to connect to
that frame.

Disconnect text frames
You disconnect text frames when you want to create separate flows—for example, to place an article
in a specific location in a newsletter, or to create a pull-quote. If you need to start a new flow in the
middle of a column, you can split the text frame that contains the column in two, and then disconnect the two text frames.
You can disconnect a text frame from the preceding text frame, the following one, or both. You can
also remove a text frame from the middle of a flow.
Disconnecting text frames does not affect existing text in the frames. To move text to a different text
frame, cut and paste it after disconnecting the frames.
NOTE:When you disconnect text frames on the same body page, FrameMaker creates separate flows

with no flow tags. When you disconnect text frames on different body pages, FrameMaker creates separate flows with the same flow tag. In either case, if you’re creating a newsletter-type document where
Autoconnect is off for each flow, the flow tags do not matter. FrameMaker does not create new pages
automatically and, thus, there is no need to make text frame connections.

130

1)

Select the text frame you want to disconnect by Control-clicking the text frame.

2)

Choose Format > Customize Layout, and then choose Disconnect Previous, Disconnect Next,
or Disconnect Both.

Page layout and templates
Remove a text frame from the middle of a flow
1)

Select the text frame immediately preceding the one you want to remove. To do this,
Control-click the text frame.

2)

Select the text frame immediately following the text frame you want to remove.

3)

Choose Format > Customize Layout > Connect Text Frames. If the first text frame you selected
isn’t on a page that’s currently visible, an alert message asks whether you want to connect to
that frame.

Split or unsplit text frames
You can split a text frame in two, and then disconnect the two text frames to start a new flow. For
example, you may want a new article with its own flow to start in the middle of a text frame.
The second of three text frames is split, disconnected from the first text frame, and retagged.

Split text frames
1)

Click in the line above where you want to split the text frame and choose Format > Customize
Layout > Split Text Frame. FrameMaker splits the text frame below the line that contains the
insertion point, creating two separate but connected text frames.

2)

Select the bottom text frame by Control-clicking the text frame.

3)

Disconnect the text frame from the previous one by choosing Format > Customize Layout >
Disconnect Previous. If the flow was tagged, FrameMaker removes the flow tag. If Autoconnect was on before you disconnected the text frames, it is now off for both text frames.

4)

Resize the text frames as necessary.

Unsplit text frames
•

If you haven’t made any other changes since splitting the text frame, choose Edit > Undo.

•

If you made another change but you have not yet disconnected the two text frames, delete the
lower frame and then resize the remaining text frame to the size of the original unsplit frame.

•

If you have already disconnected the two frames, cut the text from the second text frame and
paste it at the end of the first text frame. Then delete the second text frame and resize the first
131

Page layout and templates

3

one to the size of the original unsplit frame. If you need to turn Autoconnect back on or reassign a flow tag for the text flow, use Format > Customize Layout > Customize Text Frame.
Cross-reference a disconnected text frame
When an article in a newsletter or magazine continues from one page to another, you can use
cross-references to tell the reader where to turn to continue reading and to indicate where the end
of the article is continued from.
Indicate where the flow continues, and where it is continued from.

1)

Resize the two text frames to make room for the cross-references. Drag the bottom of the first
text frame upward and the top of the continuation text frame downward.

2)

Draw a small text frame below the text frame on the first page, and another above the text frame
on the continuation page. Don’t connect either text frame to any other text frame.

3)

Insert a cross-reference in the empty text frame on the first page, referring to the continuation
page of the article.

4)

Insert a cross-reference in the empty text frame on the continuation page, referring to the first
page of the article.

Tracking a text flow
In a document with many flows, it’s easy to lose sight of where a flow continues. You can zoom out
to see more of a text flow or move from one text frame in a flow to the next.
1)

Zoom out to 25% and adjust the window size to see as many pages as necessary.

2)

Click in the flow you want to check and choose Edit > Select All In Flow. The flow is highlighted, showing how it traverses the pages of the document.

3)

To move through a flow’s text flow’s text frames, do one of the following:
•

132

To display the next connected text frame, click in the last line of a text frame and press
the Down Arrow key.

Page layout and templates
•

To display the preceding connected text frame, click in the first line of a text frame and
press the Up Arrow key.

Set flow direction
You can specify the direction (LTR or RTL) of the text in a text frame. This implies that you can
create a document in which the direction of flows can be different. For example, you can create a
document with two flows where an LTR language (such as English or German) is authored in the left
flow and an RTL language (such as Arabic, Hebrew, or Farsi) is authored in the right frame.
1)

Select the text frame.

2)

From the Graphics menu, choose Object Properties.

3)

In the Text Frame tab, select the required direction from the Direction drop-down and click
Apply.

Templates
When you set up a template, you lay out master pages, define and apply formats, and define special
text, such as cross-reference formats and variables.
TIP:For templates you create, set up a template folder that contains the related templates as well as a

document that describes the templates and how to use them.
Unstructured templates
A template is a document that stores properties that are used in more than one place. You can
create a document from a template to give it all the template properties, or you can import
specific properties from the template later. Templates give your documents consistent layout
and formatting.
Templates can store the following properties:
•

Paragraph, character, and table formats that work with formatting information in the
element definitions

•

Page layouts that determine the number and position of columns on pages, and background items such as running headers

•

Reference pages that store repeatedly used graphics and formatting information

•

Variables you use as placeholders for text that FrameMaker updates

•

Formatting information for cross-references, equations, and conditional tags

•

Definitions for colors you can apply to text and objects

133

Page layout and templates

3

•

Document-wide settings, including footnote properties, custom marker types, and feathering options for line spacing

•

Specifications for combined Japanese and Western fonts (on Japanese-language systems)

Structured templates
Structured FrameMaker comes with Structured Templates for letters, memos, faxes, envelopes,
reports, outlines, newsletters, books, FAQs, and single source books.
Structured templates can store the following properties:
•

Element definitions that specify allowable contents, attributes, and formatting for
elements

•

Paragraphs and characters that work with formatting information in the element definitions

•

Variables you use as placeholders for text that FrameMaker updates

•

Formatting information for cross-references and conditional tags

•

Definitions for colors you can apply to text and objects

NOTE:If you’re working with structured files, an application developer can set up special docu-

ments that handle the translation to and from the structured application. These documents can
include a template that formats the structured files in FrameMaker. This template is applied
automatically when you import from the structured application.

Design the page layout
1)

Create a document. You can start with either a custom new document or a copy of an existing
document you plan to modify.
TIP:To see how facing pages look as you design the page layout, display them side by side. Choose

View > Options, and then choose Facing Pages from the Page Scrolling pop-up menu. Make the
document window larger and zoom out, if necessary, to fit both pages in the window.
2)

Define the column layout. If you started with a custom document, you have already specified
the margins and the number of columns. If you’re modifying an existing document, you may
want to change the column layout.

3)

Add and name any custom master pages you will need.

4)

Enter background text and graphics on the master pages, including headers and footers.
If a running header or footer shows the text or an autonumber of a document paragraph, such
as a chapter or section title, it contains a Running H/F variable that refers to the paragraph. To
set this up, determine the tag for that paragraph.

5)

134

Define the custom document properties, such as numbering and text options, and specify the
view options.

Page layout and templates
Designing text formats
After designing the page layout, define how you want the text to be formatted:
•

If your document will be opened or printed on computers other than your own, use fonts that
are widely available.

•

Paragraph formats provide the foundation of text formatting, so set them up before setting up
the character formats.

•

When creating a character format, set all the options in the Character Designer as As Is, and
then specify only the settings you want to change. This way, the format will work with any
paragraph format.

•

Use tags that express the purpose rather than the appearance of the text. For example, name a
format for emphasized text Emphasis rather than Bold. Then if you decide to change to italics
for emphasized text, you can redefine the Emphasis format without having to retag any text.

•

Use names that are easily recognizable. For example, you might name the formats for
numbered lists Step1 and StepNext rather than st1and stn. Or, if you want to use the keyboard
to apply paragraph and character tags, consider naming your tags st1 Step1 and stn StepNext.
That way the tags and descriptions are quickly available from the keyboard.

•

If the template uses more than one series of autonumbers, add a series label to the format for
each autonumber. For example, define step autonumbers as S:, where S: is the series label.

•

In paragraph formats, use either Space Above or Space Below consistently to add space above
or below the paragraph. (FrameMaker uses only the larger of the two values to determine the
space between paragraphs.)

Standardizing graphics, frames, and tables
If the documents will contain graphics, frames, or tables, follow these guidelines to maintain consistency:
•

Place standard items on a reference page. You can include graphics that users will need again
and again—for example, a symbol that calls attention to notes and cautions, or an anchored
frame with a standard height and width. Users can copy and paste these items as needed.

•

Create a paragraph format for anchored frames to provide consistent spacing around graphics.
For example, a paragraph format named Frame could contain a Space Below setting of 20
points and a Line Spacing setting of zero. Then, each frame could be anchored to a blank paragraph with the Frame tag. Alternatively, you can use single-cell tables and their titles for
graphics and their captions.

•

If you will use text frames for graphic callouts, create a paragraph format for the callouts. If you
will use text lines for callouts, create a character format. (You can’t apply a paragraph format
to a text line.)
135

Page layout and templates

3

•

Choose a color model and redefine colors and color views if necessary.

•

Prepare standard table formats. Not all the properties you set for tables can be imported into
another document. The width of text in actual tables varies greatly, as do other properties. So,
regardless of how you prepare your tables, users will probably need to adjust some of these
properties themselves. Think of your tables as models for users to start with.

Setting up numbering
The page numbering for new documents is set to Restart at 1. If you are building a template for
continuous page numbering in books, you may want to set the page numbering in the template to
Continue Numbering From Previous Page In Book. In addition, you may want to set the chapter
numbering to Continue Numbering From Previous File In Book.

Define special text and fonts
You may need to do the following to set up special text items:
•

Select a footnote numbering style and number format, and other footnote properties.

•

Define formats for cross-references. Standardize as much of the cross-reference format as
possible. For example, if cross-references should always be introduced by see, include that
word in the format definition.

•

Consider defining user variables for product names, document names, and other items that
may change during the course of the project.

•

Define condition tags, condition indicators, and view settings for conditional tags.

•

Define custom marker types if you have to create specialized indexes.

•

Define equation sizes and fonts if any documents will have equations.

•

If your documents will contain Japanese-language text, define the combined fonts you want to
use and set the properties of rubi text.

Set up HTML options
If documents based on your templates will be converted to HTML, you will need to set up the
mappings and conversion macros that define how documents are converted.
•

136

Set up the mappings from FrameMaker paragraph formats and character formats to HTML
tags.

Page layout and templates
•

Create the conversion macros that convert cross-reference formats to a form suitable for
online documents.

•

Create any other conversion macros you may need (for example, to place a logo at the top of
every new web page, or to define the title of the HTML document).

Create templates for generated files
When you generate a table of contents, an index, or another kind of generated file, if the folder that
contains the source document or book file contains a file whose name matches the generated filename, FrameMaker uses the formatting of the existing file when generating the new one. In effect,
the existing file serves as the new generated file’s template, just as if you had imported formats from
it. Use this feature to create generated file templates that contain page layouts, paragraph and character formats, and the formatting information that appears on the reference page.
You can also update the formats in a generated file by importing formats from a template. However,
you’ll probably need to generate the file again after importing formats to see all the formatting.
1)

Open the document or book file from which you want to generate the table of contents, index,
or other file.

2)

Generate the file.

3)

Format the generated file. This formatted file is your template.

4)

Save the generated file. Make sure that this generated file template is in the folder that contains
the document or book file that you will use to create a new generated file.

RELATED LINKS:
Import formats from a template or document

Create templates to change conditional tags settings
If you often change the view of conditional documents in a book, you may find it helpful to have a
template for each view. You can then change the view of all the files in the book at the same time by
importing the conditional tags settings from one of the templates into the book file.
If you want to change the view of a single document that contains conditional tags, it is easier to
change the document’s Show/Hide settings.
1)

Set up a basic template for the conditional document with all conditions and condition indicators visible. You’ll import conditional tags settings from this template before editing a document.

2)

Set up a template for each combination of conditions you want to view. Use these templates to
view or print one version of the document at a time. You can also use the template to change
variable definitions that are unique to a view.

137

Page layout and templates

3

Change templates for blank paper and text files
You can change the custom template for blank paper so that it contains the formats you want. The
template can contain the same formats as any other template, except for the page layout. The master
page layout, number of columns, and margins are determined when you create the blank paper
documents.
You can also change the custom template that FrameMaker uses when you open text files.
NOTE:You can change the filename that FrameMaker looks for when it creates a blank paper document

or opens a text file.
Change the template for blank paper
1)

Change a document so it contains the formats and settings you want. Leave existing master
pages empty and do not create custom master pages.

2)

Remove all text frames from both the left and right master pages—even if a document is
single-sided. (If the document is single-sided, choose Format > Page Layout > Pagination,
select Double Sided, and click Set. Then select and delete the text frames on the master pages.)

3)

Choose Special > Delete Pages and delete all body pages.

4)

Save the document, using the Custom file in the FrameMaker fminit folder. (When you choose
New > Adobe FrameMaker document from the context menu in a folder or on the desktop, the
Shellnew.fm file is used.)

Change the template for text files
1)

Change a document so it contains the formats and settings you want. For example, you can
place headers and footers, a Paragraph Catalog, and master page graphics in the template document.

2)

Delete all text on the body pages.

3)

Click in the empty text frame on page 1, and tag it with the paragraph format you want all text
in the document to use. The default template uses the Body paragraph format.

4)

Save the document, using the txttmplt file in the FrameMaker fminit folder.

Import formats from a template or document
You can import paragraph formats, table formats, variable definitions, and other properties from
any document. You can also retain or remove any format overrides in the document—for example,
changes that were made to a paragraph but not stored in the Paragraph Catalog.

138

Page layout and templates
Import formats
1)

Open the document that contains the formats you want to import.

2)

Make the appropriate document window or book window active. If a book window is active,
select the documents you want to update.

3)

In the document or book you’re updating, choose File > Import > Formats.

4)

Do one of the following:
•

To import formats from a document, choose the document from the Import From Document pop-up menu. The pop-up menu lists all open, saved documents.

•

To reapply formats from the current document, choose Current from the Import From
Document pop-up menu.

5)

Select the Import and Update settings you want to apply to the current document. By default,
all options are selected. To deselect or select all options at once, click Deselect All or Select All.
If you’re updating variable definitions, cross-reference formats, or math definitions, and if any
of these items use character formats, select Character Formats so that the formats are added to
the document.

6)

To remove changes that you made to individual formats and didn’t save in a catalog, do the
following:

7)

•

To remove page breaks that are not a part of a Paragraph Catalog format, select Manual
Page Breaks.

•

To remove paragraph, character, page layout, and table formatting overrides, select
Other Format/Layout Overrides.

Click Import.

RELATED LINKS:
About layout overrides

About import and update settings
When you import formatting information from a template, FrameMaker merges the information
into the document rather than completely replacing the information. For example, when you import
paragraph formats, FrameMaker adds the formats to the document’s Paragraph Catalog. If any
formats have the same name in both documents, the imported format overwrites the original format.
Any formats that are not overwritten remain in the document.
NOTE:Format names are case-sensitive, so Body is not the same as body.

Paragraph formats
The template’s Paragraph Catalog is merged into the document, and all formats in the catalog
are reapplied in the document. The template’s PDF bookmark settings are also copied into the
document.
139

Page layout and templates

3

Character formats
The template’s Character Catalog is merged into the document, and all formats in the catalog
are reapplied in the document.
Page layouts
The template’s master pages are merged into the document, and body pages are updated with
the master page changes. If the template and the document both have a master page with the
same name, the template’s master page replaces the document’s. FrameMaker copies the
change bar properties, all the settings in the Page Size and Pagination dialog boxes, and most
settings in the View Options dialog box.
Table formats
The template’s Table Catalog and ruling styles are merged into the document, and all formats
in the catalog are reapplied in the document.
Color definitions
The template’s color definitions and views are merged into the document.
Document properties
The template’s custom marker types and footnote properties; the volume, chapter, page, paragraph, footnote, and table footnote numbering styles in the Numbering Properties dialog box;
the characters in the Allow Line Breaks After setting in the Text Options dialog box; and the
Feather settings in the Line Layout dialog box are merged into the document. The PDF Setup
settings (other than the bookmark settings) are also merged into the document. On Japanese-language systems, the rubi properties and kumihan rules (Japanese-language typesetting
rules) are also merged into the document.
Reference pages
All the template’s reference pages (except for FrameMath reference pages) are merged into the
document. If the template and the document both have a reference page with the same name,
the template’s reference page replaces the document’s. To import FrameMath reference pages,
select Math Definitions.
Variable definitions
The template’s variable definitions are merged into the document.
Cross-reference formats
The template’s cross-reference formats are merged into the document, and internal
cross-references are updated.
Conditional tags settings
The template’s condition tags and Show/Hide settings are merged into the document and
applied to conditional tags.
Math definitions
The template’s equation size and font settings, custom math element definitions, and FrameMath reference pages are copied into the document. If a custom math element in the document
140

Page layout and templates
is deleted when the reference pages are merged, FrameMaker replaces the math element in
equations with the name of the element enclosed by question marks.
Combined fonts
On Japanese-language systems, the specifications for combined Japanese and Western fonts
are merged into the document and applied to text that uses combined fonts.

141

Editing content

4

Editing content
FrameMaker provides you with a variety of options and tools to author content. Besides text, you
can add graphics, images, tables, and links to your documents. You can also include complex mathematical equations and QR codes.

Text and special characters
As an authoring environment, FrameMaker provides you will the tools to easily add text (including
special characters) to a document. While text includes the standard characters such as letters and
numbers, you can also enter characters such as tab, bullet symbols, mathematical symbols.

Add text and special characters
The insertion point marks where you enter or edit text. The location of the insertion point determines the paragraph to which paragraph formatting commands are applied.
You can also insert special text items, such as cross-references, footnotes, variables, and markers
from the Special menu. When you click a special text item, such as a cross-reference, variable, or text
inset, you select the entire item.
If you can’t place the insertion point in or next to text, consider these possible reasons:
•

The text is background text that was typed on a master page. Display the master page that
contains the text and place the insertion point in the text on that page.

•

The text was automatically generated, as with paragraph autonumbers, cross-references, or
headers and footers.

RELATED LINKS:
Change tab stops
Search

Special characters
In addition to standard characters, you can type bullets, dashes, fixed-width spaces, mathematical
symbols, international characters, and other special characters.
NOTE:In FrameMaker, character (ALT) sequences are not implemented for Dingbats and Symbol fonts

because Unicode equivalents of codepage 1252 for these fonts are provided by default. The character
(ALT) sequences are implemented for the MakerRoman font family only.

142

Editing content
For a list of characters in the Symbol and Zapf Dingbats fonts, a list of accented characters in the
standard character set, and information on inserting the Euro currency symbol, see the online
manual FrameMaker Character Sets.
Some special characters are entered or displayed differently in dialog boxes. In Windows, you enter
a sequence of characters beginning with a backslash (\), these sequences are listed in Dialog boxes.
Tabs
Each time you press Tab, a tab symbol is embedded in the text. The symbol does not appear in the
printed document, but it is visible onscreen when text symbols are visible.
If the current paragraph has tab stops set, FrameMaker moves the insertion point and text one tab
stop each time you press Tab. If tab stops are not set, pressing Tab doesn’t move the insertion point
and text. If you press Tab more times than you have tab stops, the Tab symbols overlap. If you later
add tab stops to the paragraph, FrameMaker positions the text correctly at the tab stops.
FrameMaker uses tab stops that are absolute rather than relative. With relative tab stops, each time
you press Tab, the insertion point moves to the next available tab stop. With absolute tab stops, the
nth tab on a line moves the insertion point to the nth stop. If that tab stop is to the left of the insertion
point, the insertion point does not move.
Special spaces
When you press the spacebar, you insert a proportional space (whose width depends on the characters on either side of it). You can also insert special fixed-width spaces—for example, to increase the
space between two words. When you type a special space between two words, the words always
remain together on one line.
You can use the following types of special spaces:
•

An em space is the same width as the point size of the font you use. For example, if you use a
10-point font, an em space is 10 points wide.

•

An en space is half the width of an em space.

•

A numeric space is the same width as the font zero (0) character. All digits are typically the
same width. This space is useful for aligning numbers in a column without using tabs.

•

A thin space is one-twelfth the width of an em space. A thin space is used to separate a number
and the unit of measure that follows it, or characters that appear too close together—such as ”
/)”.

•

A nonbreaking space is the same width as the default space width for the font.

When Smart Spaces is on, you can’t type more than one proportional space in a row. However, you
can type multiple fixed-width spaces.

143

Editing content

4

Smart quotes
When Smart Quotes is on, FrameMaker uses a curved left or right quotation mark whenever you
press the , , or key. If you prefer straight quotation marks, turn off Smart Quotes.
Smart Quotes doesn’t apply to text in dialog boxes. For information on typing quotation marks and
apostrophes in dialog boxes, see the online manual FrameMaker Character Sets.

1)

To set smart specials, in the book window, select the documents you want to affect.

2)

Choose Format > Document > Text Options.

3)

Change the Smart Spaces or Smart Quotes option and click Apply.

TIP:When you select Smart Quotes, FrameMaker doesn’t change any quotation marks that are already

in the document. To find straight quotation marks and apostrophes, and change them to curved quotation marks and apostrophes, use the Spelling Checker or the Find/Change command.

Copy, move, and delete text
Pasted text retains its character format properties. If the pasted text contains paragraph symbols ,
the paragraph format associated with each paragraph is also pasted. Otherwise, the pasted text takes
the paragraph format of the paragraph in which it is pasted.
You copy text more quickly if you bypass the clipboard, which is possible only if the original text and
the new location are visible and exist in the same document. You must use the clipboard to copy and
paste text from one document to another.
NOTE:Text pasted into a new document retains the character and paragraph tags that were assigned to

it in the original document. If the text has no equivalent tag in the current document, an asterisk
appears next to the tag name in the status bar when the cursor is within the pasted text.
1)

To copy text without using the clipboard, place the insertion point where you want to insert
the copied text, hold down Alt, and select the text you want to copy.

Drag and drop text
FrameMaker allows you to drag and drop text. You can drag and drop text across various
FrameMaker documents and across other applications that support the drag and drop feature.
In addition, FrameMaker allows you to drag and drop elements.
•

To copy an element, hold the CTRL key while dropping the element in its new location.

•

If you drop an element in an invalid location, the cursor changes to a ‘?’ to indicate that the
location is invalid.

You can also drag and drop rows and columns of a table.
144

Editing content
•

In a table, to move a whole row or column, select the column or row, and hold the ALT key
while dropping it to the new location.

•

In a table, to copy a whole row or column, select the column or row, and hold the CTRL and
ALT keys together while dropping it to the new location.
NOTE: If you do not hold the ALT key while dragging columns or rows, only the contents of the

columns and rows are copied.

Importing and linking files
There are a variety of options in Adobe FrameMaker to import and link content from different
sources.

Import and link methods
You can import other Adobe FrameMaker documents, documents created in other applications, text
files, and graphic files. You can also import SWF files and 3D objects into FrameMaker documents.
An imported object can simply be copied into the document. It can also be linked—such as when
you import by reference—so that it remains tied to its source for easy updating.
RELATED LINKS:
Import text
Import graphics
Embed objects

Use the clipboard
Perhaps the easiest way to import text and graphics is by copying to and pasting from the clipboard.
When using this method, keep in mind the following:
1)

Select the object or text you want to copy and Choose Edit > Copy. The contents is copied to
the clipboard.

2)

Place the insertion point in the document where you want to paste the content, and then
choose Edit > Paste.

When using this method, keep in mind the following:
•

You can convert tab-delimited text to a table using the Table > Convert To Table command.

•

Text formatting is lost unless you’re pasting into another FrameMaker document.

•

Choosing Edit > Paste Special offers you more options. For example, you can choose to paste
text in the RTF format or as an embedded Microsoft Word document. If you want to apply
145

Editing content

4

FrameMaker formats, then paste clipboard content as text. For graphics you can paste clipboard content as an embedded bitmap, a device independent bitmap, or a metafile.
•

When you copy and paste text of a specific direction (LTR or RTL) into a FrameMaker document, you need to ensure the text direction of the destination location (document, table, or
paragraph) is set to the same direction.

Use drag-and-drop
Import and export are greatly simplified when you can drag an object to its new location.
FrameMaker supports the following drag-and-drop operations:
•

Move a graphic from one open FrameMaker document window to another by dragging the
graphic. You can also copy it by Control-dragging it or display a context (shortcut) menu when
you drop it by right-dragging it.

•

Drag a graphic between a FrameMaker document window and any other application that
supports drag-and-drop operations.

•

Drag a graphic file from a folder or the desktop into an open document window.

•

Drag one or more document files into the application window to open the files, or you can drag
a single file into a document window to embed that file.

Use the File > Import > File command
There are two ways in which you can import content by using the File > Import > File command:
Import by copying
Importing by copying makes it easy to transfer the imported material from one location to another,
but it increases the document size. In addition, if you change the source material, you need to reimport it to update the document with the latest version.
1)

Choose File > Import > File, choose the file you want to copy, and then select Copy Into Document.

Import by reference
Importing by reference keeps the imported text or graphics linked to the source file. FrameMaker
stores the path to the source file in the document. Each time you open the document, FrameMaker
locates the file on the disk and displays it. If the source file was revised, FrameMaker updates the
document with the latest version. Importing by reference can reduce total file size because it lets you

146

Editing content
use the same material in several places without storing the contents of imported images or text in the
FrameMaker document. Text imported by reference is called a text inset.
1)

Choose File > Import > File, choose the file you want to copy, and then select Import By Reference

For information on how the path is stored when importing by reference, see Using paths when
importing by reference.
Use the File > Import > Object command
The main benefit of using Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is to display visualizations of data
created in programs other than FrameMaker. The File > Import > Object option associates the
imported object with the program used to create it so that you can edit the object in its native software. For example, you can insert a pie-chart created using Microsoft Excel in a FrameMaker document. Each time you double-click the inserted object, FrameMaker opens it in Microsoft Excel for
you to edit.
NOTE: You cannot embed or link an object whose native software is not installed on your computer. For

example, if you open a document having a Photoshop image embedded through File > Import > Object,
you need to have Photoshop installed on your computer to be able to edit this image.
Consider the following factors when deciding whether to import text and graphics by reference or
to use OLE to embed or link them instead:
•

If the material you want to include comes from another FrameMaker document, use import by
reference. This provides many more import options.

•

If you want to collapse a linked file to an icon instead of displaying the full contents of the file
in your document, use OLE linking.

•

If the material you want to include is in a format that FrameMaker can’t open, use OLE.

•

If you edit or view your document on multiple platforms, use import by reference. OLE works
only in Windows.

•

If the text or graphics you want to include comes from an application that doesn’t support
OLE, use import by reference.

Using paths when importing by reference
When you import by reference with File > Import > File, the path to the text or graphic can be either
absolute or relative. A relative path begins at a current folder or one folder up the hierarchy and specifies the file’s location from there. An absolute path begins at the root of the file system (the topmost
folder) and fully specifies the file’s location from there. Following are two examples of absolute paths.
•

d:\Graphics\Mountain.gif

•

\\DocServer\Graphics\Mountain.gif
147

Editing content

4

FrameMaker stores relative paths whenever possible so that it can find an imported file even when
you move both the document and the source file—as long as you keep the files in the same relative
locations. If you save the document in a different folder, FrameMaker adjusts the paths of the
imported files accordingly. However, if the path to the imported file traverses the root (the topmost
folder) of the file system, FrameMaker uses absolute paths that begins at the root.
To ensure that FrameMaker uses relative paths, make sure that it does not have to traverse the root
to locate the file.

Import text
You can use the File > Import > File command to import text on all platforms. This method provides
more flexibility than using the clipboard.
However, if you’re working on only one platform, you might want to use a platform-specific
approach. For information, see Embed objects.
The text you import can be formatted or unformatted. Unformatted text contains only the words; it
has no information on fonts, indents, spacing, autonumbering, and so on. Formatted text contains
these types of information.
Import formatted text
You can import formatted text into a FrameMaker document by importing from the following
sources:
•

A text flow from another part of the same document

•

A text flow from another FrameMaker document

•

A text flow from another FrameMaker document that is a Maker Interchange Format (MIF)
file

•

A file created in another application, such as Microsoft Word, which has an installed filter

When you import text from another FrameMaker document, you also import cross-references, footnotes, variables, markers, tables, and anchored frames. Conditional tags in the flow is also imported.
When you import text from another application, some of these special items may be imported,
depending on the capabilities of the other application and the filter used.

148

1)

Click where you want to insert the text and choose File > Import > File.

2)

Specify the file that contains the flow you want to import and the import method.

3)

Click Import.

4)

If the Unknown File Type dialog box appears, select a file type and click Convert. The dialog
box that appears next depends on the import method you chose in step 2. The Import Text
Flow by Reference dialog box contains settings for specifying how to update the imported flow.
Choose a body page flow or a reference page flow. Typically, the text you import will come

Editing content
from body pages. Reference pages can contain flows with boilerplate text or graphics for use on
body pages.
5)

6)

7)

Specify how to format the imported text by doing one of the following:
•

To apply the current document’s formats to the imported text whenever their tags match,
click Reformat Using Current Document’s Formats. If the tags don’t match, the formatting of imported text is unaffected. Usually, you would also select the options to remove
manual page breaks and other format overrides (such as font properties or tab settings)
so that the imported text looks like text in the current document with the same tags.

•

To remove the formatting from the imported text and apply the character and paragraph
formatting used at the insertion point, click Reformat As Plain Text. (Text in tables or
anchored frames retains the formatting it had in the source document.)

•

To keep the formatting from the source document, click Retain Source’s Formatting.
Formats in the imported text aren’t added to the current document’s format catalogs. If
you later modify the current document’s formats, the imported text formats won’t be
affected—even if the tags in the current document and imported text match.

If you are importing the text by reference, specify how to update the text inset by doing one of
the following:
•

To update the text inset whenever you open the document, click Automatic.

•

To update only when you specify, click Manual.

Click Import. If you imported the text by reference, it appears as a text inset. (A text inset is
linked to the source document and can’t be edited outside that source document.)

Import unformatted text
When you import the text from an unformatted text file, you specify whether to import it by copying
or by reference and how to treat lines in the text file. The imported text adopts the character and
paragraph formatting used at the insertion point.
1)

Place the insertion point where you want to insert the text, and then choose File > Import >
File.

2)

Specify the text file you want to import, and the import method.

3)

Click Import. The dialog box that appears depends on the import method (Import By Reference or Copy Into Document) you chose.

4)

Specify how to treat the imported text by doing one of the following:
•

To break the text into paragraphs only at blank lines, click Merge Lines into Paragraphs.
Use this option for a paragraph-oriented text file such as a file containing document text.

•

To break the text into paragraphs at the end of each line, click Treat Each Line As A Paragraph. Use this option for a line-oriented text file such as a file containing computer code.

149

Editing content
•

5)

4
To convert the imported text to a table, click Convert To Table. Specify a table format and
other settings. Use this option only if the file contains delimited text, such as text output
from a database program.

If you are importing the text by reference, specify how to update the text inset by doing one of
the following:
•

To update the text inset whenever you open the document, click Automatic.

•

To update only when you specify, click Manual.

6)

If necessary, choose a character encoding from the Text Encoding pop-up menu. Do this only
if you know that the preselected encoding is incorrect. If you force an incorrect encoding, character substitution sometimes occurs or some characters appear as question marks.

7)

Click Import. If you imported the text by reference, it appears as a text inset.

Import graphics
You can import Adobe® Photoshop®, JPEG 2000, SVG, and Adobe® Illustrator® files into
FrameMaker. Use File > Import > File to import graphics.
You can import a graphic into an anchored or unanchored graphic frame, into a rectangle that serves
as a bounding box, or directly onto a page. If you want the graphic to move with text as you edit the
document—for example, a graphic in longer documents or documents intended for HTML conversion—import the graphic into an anchored frame. If you want the graphic to stay where you place
it—for example, if the graphic is the logo of a letterhead—import it onto the page and position it
where you want it.
When you import a graphic, you can specify an import filter on the basis of the graphic’s format.
When you import a bitmap image, you also specify its scale in dots per inch (dpi). The larger the dpi
value, the smaller the graphic is on the page.
When you copy an image, or copy an image by reference, into a document, you can specify an HTTP
path from which to import the graphic. The HTTP path is preserved in the XML roundtrip.
RELATED LINKS:
Using paths when importing by reference

Import a graphic
1)

150

Specify the position of the graphic by doing one of the following:
•

To place the imported graphic in a graphic frame, select an existing frame or place an
insertion point in a text frame.

•

To place the imported graphic directly on a page, click in the page margin.

•

To use a drawn rectangle to define the size of the imported bitmap graphic, select an
existing rectangle or draw one (do not select an anchored or unanchored frame). The

Editing content
graphic replaces the rectangle if the Fit in Selected Rectangle option is selected when you
import; however, the aspect ratio of the graphic remains unchanged.
•

To replace an existing graphic, select it.

2)

Choose File > Import > File.

3)

Select the graphic file you want to import, or specify the HTTP path of the graphic file to
import, and the import method.

4)

Click Import.

5)

If the Unknown File Type dialog box appears when you click Import, select a file type in the
scroll list and click Convert.

6)

If you're importing a bitmap graphic, choose a scaling option or Fit in Selected Rectangle and
click Set.

TIP:For the best printed results, choose a dpi value that divides evenly (or leaves only a small

remainder) into the resolution of your printer or typesetter. For the best screen representation, choose
a dpi value that divides evenly into your screen resolution. (Windows screens typically have a resolution of 96 dpi.)
RELATED LINKS:
Import and link methods
Resize imported graphics
Embed objects

Import JPEG 2000 files
FrameMaker supports JPEG 2000, a version of the JPEG image-compression format.
When importing JPEG 2000 files, the filter converts the supported color modes of RGB, CMYK,
Grayscale, and LAB and discards unsupported modes such as Index. The filter does not support
16-bit-per-channel images.
1)

Choose File > Import > File.

2)

Specify the file you want to import, and select Import By Reference or Copy Into Document.

3)

Click Import. If the Unknown File Type dialog box appears, select JPC, J2C, JPX, JPF, J2K, or
JP2, and click Convert.

Import SVG images
When importing a Scalable Vector Graphic (SVG), the SVG Import dialog box allows the user to
select the rasterization quality of the image. By increasing the rasterization quality, printed and PDF
versions are crisper; however, increasing the rasterization also increases the file size of the image, and
it takes longer to import it.

151

Editing content

4

FrameMaker prints Scalable Vector Graphic (SVG) images to PostScript printers by rendering the
images as vector graphics using Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). For non-PostScript printers,
FrameMaker uses the FrameImage format.
In addition, when you create a PDF file from a document containing an SVG image, the image
appears as vectors, which improves its look in Acrobat and allows you to zoom in on it without
pixelation.
NOTE:Embedded SVG image animations are not functional in FrameMaker.

1)

Choose File > Import > File.

2)

Click Import.

3)

Specify the file you want to import, and select Import By Reference or Copy Into Document.

4)

Click Import.

5)

In the Import SVG dialog box, specify the raster quality.

6)

Specify image dimensions if they are different from the default size (you can’t scale proportionally in this dialog box).

7)

Click Set.

NOTE:Depending on the rasterization quality and available memory, it might take several minutes for

the SVG image to import.
Import Adobe Photoshop files
FrameMaker supports importing of Adobe Photoshop (PSD) files. FrameMaker converts PSD files
to native FrameImage format and converts the color space (Photoshop RGB, CMYK, LAB, Indexed,
Grayscale, or Bitmap) to RGB.
You import PSD files the same way you import other types of graphics.
Import Adobe Illustrator files
When you import an Adobe Illustrator file into FrameMaker, the file is treated as a graphic, and only
one page can be imported at a time. You can import it either by copy or by reference. Both process
and spot colors can be displayed and printed.
NOTE:Graphics that use transparency do not always print as expected to a PostScript Level 1 or
non-PostScript printer. If you run FrameMaker using the -noapi option (./maker.exe
-noapi), you won’t be able to import PDF files.

152

1)

In FrameMaker, choose File > Import > File, and specify the Illustrator file you want to import.

2)

Select either Import By Reference or Copy Into Document.

3)

Click Import.

Editing content
4)

If the file has more than one page, specify the page number you want by typing the page
number into the box.

5)

Click Select.

Illustrator files are imported at the page size of the file. Resize the anchored frame to crop any white
space from the image.
Locate missing graphics
When you open a document that contains graphic files imported by reference, FrameMaker looks
for the referenced graphic files. If it can’t find a graphic file, it displays a dialog box.
Locate a graphic FrameMaker can’t find
1)

2)

When FrameMaker displays the Missing File dialog box, do one of the following:
•

To find and display the graphic, use the scroll list to select it and click Update Document
to Use New Path. FrameMaker continues to use the new path to try to find other missing
files while opening the document. That way, if you move all your graphic files to a new
location, you specify the new path only once.

•

To skip the graphic file, click Skip This File. The skipped graphic appears as a gray rectangle in the document. The next time you open the document, FrameMaker tries to find
the file again.

•

To skip other graphic files if they can’t be found, click Ignore All Missing Files.

Click Continue.

View an imported graphic’s filename
1)

Select the graphic that has been imported by reference and choose Graphics > Object Properties. The graphic’s name and path appear in the panel.

Insert imported graphic elements into structured documents
Some graphic elements are defined for you to import a graphic along with the element. When you
insert the element, FrameMaker displays an import dialog box. The graphic you import appears in
an anchored frame below the line with the anchor symbol, and the frame is automatically sized large
enough for the graphic.

153

Editing content

4

Imported graphic in an anchored frame

After inserting the element, you can edit the frame by moving it, resizing it, and so on.
You can also import a graphic into an existing anchored frame—for example, if you used a graphic
element that placed an empty frame in the document.
When you import a graphic element, you can make it part of your document (imported by copying)
or keep it linked to its original application or document (imported by reference).
For information on inserting an imported graphic that’s not an element (which you can do only in
an unstructured flow), see Import graphics.
RELATED LINKS:
Fill and edit anchored frames
Import and link methods

Insert an imported graphic element
1)

Click where you want to anchor the frame.

2)

Select an imported graphic element in the Element Catalog, and click Insert.
You can also use File > Import > File to insert an element. Select a file and click Import. If more
than one imported graphic element is available, choose the one you want from the Element Tag
pop-up menu in the next dialog box that appears.

3)

Select the graphic file you want to import and specify whether to import by copying or by reference.

4)

Click Import.

5)

If the Unknown File Type dialog box appears, select a file type in the scroll list and click
Convert.

6)

If the graphic you’re importing is a bitmap, choose a scaling option from the pop-up menu and
click Set. The larger the dpi (dots-per-inch) value, the smaller the graphic is on the page.

An anchored frame with the imported graphic appears in the document window, with an anchor
symbol at the insertion point. A bubble with the text snippet  appears in the Structure
View.

154

Editing content
If no imported graphic element is available at the location you want, you can use an invalid element.
After inserting the element, talk to your developer about making the element valid at this location.
RELATED LINKS:
Import by copying
Change the scope of elements available in a structured document

Use an invalid imported graphic element
1)

Do one of the following:
•

To use an element that is valid in another part of the document, either insert the element
in a valid location and then move it, or use the All Elements setting to make the element
available everywhere and then insert the element where you want it.

•

To insert an invalid element with the default tag GRAPHIC, use File > Import > File to
import a graphic. (The element has a default tag if no defined imported graphic elements
are available.)

Add an imported graphic to an existing anchored frame
1)

Select the frame and use File > Import > File to import the graphic.

Import movies, SWF files, and 3D objects
You can import SWF files (for example, Adobe Captivate demos) into FrameMaker documents by
copying or by reference.
You can also import 3D objects (U3D format) into documents by copying or by reference. You can
set parameters for the 3D object, such as default view, rendering mode, background color, and
lighting scheme. You can also choose to render a 3D object in an anchored or unanchored frame.
For a series of tutorials and demonstrations on using rich media in FrameMaker authoring, watch
the episodes on the Technical Communications channel on Adobe TV.
Import movies
You can add movies to documents by embedding media files. FrameMaker supports the following
media formats.
•

AIF/AIFF (Audio Interchange File Format) WMV

•

ASF (Advanced Systems Format File)

•

AU (Audio File)

•

AVI (Audio Video Interleave File)

•

FLV (Flash Video File)

155

Editing content
•

IVF (Indeo Video Format File)

•

KAR (Karaoke MIDI File)

•

M1V (MPEG-1 Video File)

•

M3U (Media Playlist File)

•

MID (MIDI File)

•

MOV (Apple QuickTime Movie)

•

MP2 (MPEG Layer II Compressed Audio File)

•

MP3 (MP3 Audio File)

•

MP4 (MPEG-4 Video file)

•

MPA (MPEG-2 Audio File)

•

MPE (MPEG Movie File)

•

MPEG (MPEG Movie)

•

MPG (MPEG Video File)

•

QT (Apple QuickTime Movie)

•

WAV (DTS-WAV File)

•

WMV (Windows Media Video File)

4

For more information see Embed objects.
When you print a document containing a QuickTime movie, only the movie title appears.
NOTE:Don’t move or delete the original QuickTime movie file, even if you used the Copy into Document
option when you imported it. Even with this option, the entire QuickTime movie is not copied into your
document.

Import a SWF file
NOTE:Ensure that you have installed Adobe® Flash® Player on your computer to play SWF files.
NOTE: SWF files embedded inside PDF documents, do not need Adobe Flash Player, to play. Acrobat

Pro and Acrobat Reader can play these files.

156

1)

Place the insertion point in your document where you want the SWF file to appear.

2)

Select File > Import > File.

3)

Navigate to, and select, the SWF file you want to insert.

4)

Select the Copy Into Document or Import by Reference option.

5)

Click Import.

Editing content
6)

In the Graphic Scaling dialog box, select the desired DPI, and then click Set.

When you click Set, the first frame of the SWF file appears in the document. If you imported the file
by reference, double-click the first frame to play the SWF file in a separate Adobe Flash Player
window. If you copied the SWF file into the document, a bitmap image of the first frame is displayed.
Click the frame to activate the SWF file. If the first frame is blank, the anchored frame containing the
SWF file appears blank.
NOTE:You can’t use any graphic operations on a SWF file in a FrameMaker document. In

FrameMaker, SWF and FLV files are saved as RichMedia objects in PDF.
Import 3D objects
1)

Place the insertion point in your document where you want the 3D object to appear.

2)

Select File > Import > File.

3)

Navigate to and select the U3D file you want to import.

4)

Select the Copy Into Document or Import By Reference option.

5)

Click Import.

6)

Select the desired DPI and click Set.

When you click Set, the bitmap of the 3D object appears in the document. If you imported the 3D
object by copying it, the U3D file is embedded in the document as a device-independent bitmap
(DIB) in the document. If you imported the 3D object by reference, a bitmap image linked to the
source U3D file is inserted in the document. Regardless of the method of importing the 3D file, the
file is rendered in the DIB facet in the document.
When you import the 3D object into a document and save it in PDF or XML format, all information
about the 3D object is preserved.
Save a document containing 3D objects
You can save a document containing 3D objects in PDF and XML formats.
1)

Select File > Open, and then open the FrameMaker book or file containing 3D objects.

2)

Select File > Save As PDF.

3)

You can change the save location and the filename if you want, and then click Save.

4)

Click Set in the PDF Setup dialog box to generate PDF with the default settings. Or, set additional options, and then click Set. The U3D file imported into the book or file is saved along
with all its views. When you open the PDF, the view you last selected for the 3D object in the
document displays in the PDF.

NOTE:By default, FrameMaker is configured to embed 3D objects in PDFs. However, you can disable

this option.

157

Editing content

4

In the PDF, click the 3D object to view the 3D toolbar and to activate the interactive features of the
3D object. The Adobe Acrobat 3D toolbar, which is displayed above every 3D object in a PDF, lets
you zoom, pan, rotate, and analyze 3D designs.
Save documents containing 3D objects as XML
You can save a FrameMaker file containing a 3D object as XML. When you open the XML file in
FrameMaker, the 3D object is preserved through XML roundtrip. The 3D object is extracted and
saved as an independent U3D file, along with the XML file. When the file is opened again in
FrameMaker, the 3D object appears at the location where it was inserted.
To preserve changes made to a 3D object during a roundtrip in an XML file, add a new attribute
called insetdata with the following properties in the Graphic section of the DTD file, along with
other attributes such as Offset and DPI:
insetdata CDATA #IMPLIED

Similarly, you must add the following lines in the XSD file:

NOTE:The insetdata attribute does not support read/write rules.

If you don’t modify the DTD and XSD files, U3D files can still be exported to XML. However,
changes made to the U3D file in FrameMaker are not preserved during a roundtrip.
1)

Select File > Open, and open the FrameMaker file containing 3D objects.

2)

Select File > Save As XML.

3)

You can change the save location and the filename, and then click Save.

NOTE:When you open the XML file in a 3D compatible XML Editor, the relevant graphic element

contains a reference to the U3D file, with the filename and location of the U3D file. If you open the
XML file in FrameMaker, the 3D object appears as a bitmap image.
Print a FrameMaker file with 3D objects
You can print a document with 3D objects. The 3D objects are printed as bitmap images.
1)

Open the document containing 3D objects.

2)

Select File > Print.

3)

Set the remaining print options as necessary, and then click Print.

Configure a 3D model imported into FrameMaker
You can configure a 3D model you have imported into a document by setting its background color,
lighting schemes, changing views, and rendering mode.

158

Editing content
Set the background color for a 3D object
You can change the color that appears behind a 3D object. The default background color is white.
1)

Select a 3D object.

2)

Select Graphics > 3D Menu option > Background Color.

3)

Select the desired color and click OK.

Set lighting schemes for a 3D object
You can select from a wide range of 3D lighting schemes to cast a 3D object using different light
sources. The default lighting scheme for all 3D objects is Lights From File.
1)

Select a 3D object.

2)

Select Graphics > 3D Menu option > Lighting, and choose one of the following light sources:
Lights From File, No Lights, White Lights, Day Lights, Bright Lights, Primary Color Lights,
Night Lights, Blue Lights, Red Lights, Cube Lights, CAD Optimized Lights, or Headlamp.

Set views for 3D objects in FrameMaker
The 3D object you import into a document can contain predefined views. You can change the view
set for the object; the selected view is rendered when the document is saved. When you convert this
FrameMaker document to a PDF, all predefined views of the 3D object are available in the PDF. The
last view that you selected in the document before saving becomes the default view in the PDF.
1)

Select a 3D object.

2)

Select Graphics > 3D Menu option > Show Existing Views, choose a view from the list that
appears in the dialog box, and click OK.

NOTE:If you save the document as a PDF, all views of the U3D objects are available in the converted

document.
Render a 3D object in a document
The rendering modes for 3D objects vary from the Wireframe, Solid, to Transparent Bounding box.
The default rendering mode is Solid.
1)

Select a 3D object.

2)

Select Graphics > 3D Menu option > Rendering Mode, and then choose one of the following
rendering modes: Bounding Box, Transparent Bounding Box, Transparent Bounding Box
Outline, Vertices, Shaded Vertices, Wireframe, Shaded Wireframe, Solid, Transparent, Solid
Wireframe, Transparent Wireframe, Illustration, Solid Outline, Shaded Illustration, or Hidden
Wireframe.

159

Editing content

4

Poster file for a media file
You can set a poster file to an imported media file. Importing a SWF file into FrameMaker, displays
the first frame of the SWF file as the poster for the SWF file.
SWF file with first frame as the poster

For a SWF file whose first frame cannot be read, and for all other media types, FrameMaker displays
the relevant placeholder image.
For structured documents, if an attribute is defined in the DTD with the name posterfile for a
graphic object, the attribute is automatically mapped to the poster property of the anchored frame.
You can also map any attribute to a poster using a rule in the read write file. The file referred in the
attribute becomes the poster.
Set a poster image
FrameMaker sets the selected image as the poster. If the image that has been set as a poster is missing,
FrameMaker sets a special image as the poster.
1)

Right click the inserted media file.

2)

Select Set Poster.

3)

Select the image file (JPEG, PNG, BMP, or GIF) and click OK.

Reset the poster image
1)

Right click the inserted media file.

2)

Select Set Default Poster.

Import other files
You can import PageMaker, QuarkXPress, PDF, RTF, MIF, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft Excel
files into FrameMaker. Use File > Import > File to import these files.

160

Editing content
NOTE: FrameMaker lets you import PageMaker 6.5 or 7.0 and QuarkXPress 3.3 or 4.1 documents.

Import PageMaker and QuarkXPress files
1)

In FrameMaker, choose File > Open, and specify the PageMaker or QuarkXpress file you want
to import.

2)

Choose the appropriate file type in the Unknown File Type dialog box:

3)

•

If importing a PageMaker file, choose PageMaker [version] Document or PageMaker
[version] Template.

•

If importing a QuarkXPress file, choose QuarkXpress Document (3.3-4.1x).

Click Convert. If the Missing File dialog box appears, navigate to the folder that contains the
missing file, click the name of the file, and click Continue.

FrameMaker imports the main components of PageMaker and QuarkXPress files.
Master Pages
FrameMaker adds a new master page for each master page in the document you are importing.
All master-page items are placed on their corresponding master pages in FrameMaker. If you
have custom-named master pages in PageMaker, FrameMaker uses the same name.
For QuarkXPress documents, FrameMaker imports all text objects on master pages as text
flows, and preserves all body-page overrides. FrameMaker drops any overrides for other
objects on body pages.
Sections
FrameMaker ignores sections and imports their contents only.
Layers
FrameMaker treats all layers in an imported document as one layer. The page items are drawn
according to their stacking order on the page, starting with items on the master page and then
items on the body page.
Character styles
FrameMaker creates new character formats for the character styles in the document you’re
importing. If a character style has the same name as a character format in FrameMaker, the
attributes in the character format are replaced by the corresponding attributes from the
imported file. FrameMaker doesn’t import PageMaker or QuarkXPress character attributes
that aren’t supported by FrameMaker.
Paragraph styles
FrameMaker creates new paragraph formats for the paragraph styles in the document you’re
importing. If a paragraph style has the same name as a paragraph format in FrameMaker, the
attributes in the paragraph format are replaced by the corresponding attributes from the

161

Editing content

4

imported file. FrameMaker doesn’t import PageMaker or QuarkXPress paragraph attributes
that aren’t supported by FrameMaker.
FrameMaker creates a paragraph format (right) for each paragraph style (left) in the PageMaker document you’re
importing.

Paragraphs with local overrides in the original document are also treated as overrides by
FrameMaker.
Importing tagged text from PageMaker displays the actual tag names in the FrameMaker document. Deselect Export Tags in the PageMaker Text Export dialog box to import the text only,
not the tag name.
Paragraph rules
FrameMaker imports paragraph rules as a single-line frame defined in the reference pages. All
other settings applied to the rules, such as line colors, line styles, and so on, are not imported.
Drawing objects
FrameMaker imports all drawing objects. If fill and stroke colors are different, the fill color is
used for both stroke and fill. The runaround settings are dropped.
Non-printing objects
FrameMaker doesn’t import non-printing objects.
Tate-Chu-Yoko
Because FrameMaker doesn’t support vertical text, FrameMaker treats Tate-Chu-Yoko as
horizontal text.
Color definitions
FrameMaker creates color definitions to match custom colors or colors from a color library
that are defined in the PageMaker or QuarkXPress file. However, if a color definition with the
same name exists in FrameMaker, the FrameMaker color is used, and no new color is created.

162

Editing content
Graphics
FrameMaker uses its filters to import linked (referenced) graphics files. If it doesn’t have the
appropriate filter, FrameMaker doesn’t import the graphics files. For embedded graphics,
FrameMaker uses the image data to import the graphics.
When importing a floating graphic, FrameMaker positions the graphic at the same position as
in the original file. When importing an inline graphic, FrameMaker positions the graphic in
the text flow in the same text position as in the original file.
OLE objects
FrameMaker supports OLE. FrameMaker imports OLE objects as long as FrameMaker
supports the graphic format.
Grouped objects
FrameMaker supports hierarchical grouping of objects.
Hyperlinks
FrameMaker supports hyperlinks. For PageMaker documents, FrameMaker imports object
and page item anchors as cross-references.
Table of contents
FrameMaker imports the table of contents generated in QuarkXPress or PageMaker as regular
text.
Pasteboards
FrameMaker imports all pasteboard objects inline in their corresponding anchored frame.
FrameMaker creates a separate section in the reference pages for the pasteboard objects it
imports.
Indexing
FrameMaker imports all index entry markers but treats the index as regular text.
Import PDF files
When you import a PDF file into a FrameMaker document, the PDF file is treated as a graphic. Only
one page of the PDF file can be imported into the FrameMaker document at a time. Both process
and spot colors can be displayed and printed.
Graphics that use transparency do not always print as expected on a PostScript Level 1 or non-PostScript printer.
1)

Specify the position of the graphic.

2)

Choose File > Import > File.

3)

Select the PDF file you want to import and click Import.

163

Editing content
4)

4

If the PDF file has more than one page, specify the page number in the Select PDF Page dialog
box. Use the slider to display a thumbnail image of the page you want, and then click Select.

Import MIF files
MIF is a text format that lets you exchange information between FrameMaker and other applications. All types of format and page layout information are translated to MIF commands.
FrameMaker interprets the commands in the MIF file, turning them back to formatting and layout
properties.
You can import the text of a specified flow of a MIF file as you do any FrameMaker file. When you
import by copying, all reference and master pages are imported as well as the body pages. The body
text appears on a disconnected page. For information on MIF, see the online manual MIF Reference.
RELATED LINKS:
Connect text frames
Import formatted text

Import Microsoft Word files
You can import Microsoft Word (.doc or .docx) documents into FrameMaker documents.
If you saved your Microsoft Word document in the Word 97-2003 format, you can import it using
the Microsoft Word or the Microsoft Word 2007 filter. However, if you want to import a Microsoft
Word 2007 document, you must use the Microsoft Word 2007 filter. You can import RTF files using
the Microsoft RTF 1.6 filter in the Unknown File Type dialog box.
NOTE: When you import a Word document of a specific direction (LTR or RTL) into a FrameMaker

document, you need to ensure the text direction of the destination location (document, table, or paragraph) is set to the same direction.
1)

Place the insertion point in the document where you want to insert the text, and then choose
File > Import > File.

2)

Specify the file you want to import, select the Import by Reference or Copy Into Document
option, and then select Import.
Depending on the document you are importing, the Microsoft Word or Microsoft Word 2007
filter is selected in the Unknown File Type dialog box.

3)

Click Convert. The Import Text Flow by Copy or the Import Text Flow by Reference dialog
box appears.

NOTE:Bookmarks within Word documents become cross-reference markers; annotations in Word

documents become conditional tags with the condition “Comment” when imported by reference;
hidden text in Word documents becomes conditional tags with the condition “Hidden” when imported.
Depending on if you choose Import by Reference or Copy Into Document, you need to follow the
steps in one of the following procedures:
164

Editing content
Import by Reference
If you choose Import by Reference in step 2 above:
1)

In the Flow to Import area, select a Body Page Flow or a Reference Page Flow.

2)

In the Formatting of Imported Flow area, select one of the following options:

3)

4)

•

To select the Remove Manual Page Breaks option and the Other Format Overrides
option, click Reformat Using Current Document's Formats.

•

To convert the imported content to plain text and then insert it in the document, click
Reformat as Plain Text.

•

To retain the imported content in its original format and then insert it in the document,
click Retain Source's Formatting.

In the Import Text Flow by Reference dialog box, select one of the following options in the
Updating of Imported Flow area:
•

To update the imported flow area automatically, click Automatic.

•

To update the imported flow area manually, click Manual.

Click Import.

Copy Into Document
If you choose Copy Into Document in step 2 above:
1)

If you choose to import a .docx document, you are prompted with a warning that importing a
Word document of type .docx can cause loss of data. You can still choose to import the .docx
document or you can cancel the procedure and first convert the document to .doc in Word.
FrameMaker analyses the paragraph and character styles in the Word document and maps
these to the paragraph and character styles defined in the current FrameMaker template.
The Word Import dialog displays a message indicating (green indicator) the styles in the
source Word document that matched the styles in the destination FrameMaker template. If a
matching FrameMaker style is not found, the FrameMaker document formats defaults to the
source Word style.
IMPORTANT:The style mapping is performed based on the names of the styles found in the Word

and FrameMaker documents. The mapping is not based on the formatting definition of the styles.
In the FrameMaker document formats list, for each Word style, you have the option to select
an alternative FrameMaker style.
2)

In the drop-down list, choose a FrameMaker style that you want FrameMaker to apply to the
corresponding Word styles in the imported document.
If the FrameMaker template contains a mapping style, the FrameMaker style is displayed, by
default, in the drop-down. You can use this style or choose any other template style from the
drop-down.
165

Editing content

4

3)

If no mapping FrameMaker style was found for the Word style, by default, FrameMaker will
apply the Word style formatting. However, you can still choose an alternate FrameMaker style
from the drop-down.

4)

If the Word style contains a corresponding FrameMaker style, to use the Word style formatting, click the Keep Word formatting.

5)

For each style map, if you retain the default option  or you choose the Keep
Word Formatting option, the Word style definitions are imported into FrameMaker.
However, if a paragraph or character style in Word contains an inline style, select Import
Word document inline styles and list format to include the inline styles in the FrameMaker
document.

6)

For each table in the Word document, choose to use the table style as defined in the Word
document or select a FrameMaker table style from the Tables drop-down list.

7)

In the Advanced Setting dialog, you can choose to remove the manual page breaks, if any, that
are included in the Word document.
You can also choose to not include empty paragraphs, if any, that are included in the Word
document.

8)

Click Save Preset File to save the current settings such as the paragraph, character, and table
style mapping settings to a preset file.
Later, if you are importing other documents that use similar styles and you need to use the
same style mapping, click the open button to use the saved preset file.

Import Microsoft Excel files
You can import Microsoft Excel documents with XLS or XSLX extensions into FrameMaker documents.
If you saved your Microsoft Excel document in the Excel 97-2003 Workbook format, you can import
it using the Microsoft Excel or the Microsoft Excel 2007 filter. However, if you want to import a
Microsoft Excel 2007 document, you must use the Microsoft Excel 2007 filter.
1)

Click where you want to insert the file, and choose File > Import > File.

2)

Specify the file you want to import, select Import by Reference or Copy Into Document option,
and click Import.
Depending on the document you are importing, the Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Excel 2007
filter is selected in the Unknown File Type dialog box.

166

3)

Click Convert. The Import Text Flow By Copy or the Import Text Flow By Reference dialog
box appears.

4)

In the Flow To Import area, select Body Page Flow or Reference Page Flow.

5)

In the Formatting Of Imported Flow area, select one of these options:

Editing content

6)

7)

•

To select the Remove Manual Page Breaks option and the Other Format Overrides
option, click Reformat Using Current Document's Formats.

•

To convert the imported content to plain text and then insert it in the document, click
Reformat As Plain Text.

•

To retain the imported content in its original format and then insert it in the document,
click Retain Source's Formatting.

In the Import Text Flow By Reference dialog box, select one of the following options displayed
in the Updating Of Imported Flow area:
•

To update the imported flow area automatically, click Automatic.

•

To update the imported flow area manually, click Manual.

Click Import.

Import formatting properties

Import formats
You can import a wide variety of formatting information—including page layouts, paragraph and
table formats, variable and color definitions, and conditional tags settings. If your source document
has any conditional expressions created, they, along with their Show As Per Expression status are
also imported into the target documents. Similarly, in structured documents, any Filter By Attribute
settings that you defined are also imported.

1)

Open the template with the formats. The template must be named and saved.

2)

Open the document or book that you want to update. If a book window is active, select the
documents you want to update.

3)

In the document or book you’re updating, choose File > Import > Formats.

4)

Choose the template from the Import from Document pop-up menu. The menu lists all open,
named documents.
You can also choose the current document to reapply the formats the document already has.
This is useful mainly for removing formatting changes, as described in step 6.

5)

Select the Import and Update settings you want to apply to the current document.
•

If you’re updating cross-reference formats, math definitions, or variable definitions, and
if any of these items uses character formats, also select Character Formats so that any new
formats are added to the document.

167

Editing content
•
6)

4
If the HTML mappings have been modified, select Reference Pages.

If you want to remove formatting changes that are not saved in catalog formats, do the
following:
•

To remove page breaks that are not part of a paragraph format, select Manual Page
Breaks.

•

To remove paragraph, character, page layout, and table formatting overrides, select
Other Format/Layout Overrides.

IMPORTANT:In most cases, do not select Other Format/Layout Overrides in a structured docu-

ment because the element definitions sometimes use format overrides.
7)

Click Import.

Format settings
When you import formats, FrameMaker merges the new formatting information into the document.
For example, if you import table formats, the formats are added to the Table Catalog. If a format
already in the catalog has the same name as an imported format, the imported format replaces the
original one. Any formats that are not overwritten remain in the catalog.
Paragraph formats
The template’s Paragraph Catalog is merged into the document, and all formats in the catalog
are reapplied in the document.
Character formats
The template’s Character Catalog is merged into the document, and all formats in the catalog
are reapplied in the document.
Page layouts
The template’s master pages are merged into the document, and body pages are updated with
the master page changes. If the template and the document both have a master page with the
same name, the master page of the template replaces that of the document. FrameMaker copies
the change bar properties, all the settings in the Page Size and Pagination dialog boxes, and
most settings in the View Options dialog box.
Table formats
The template’s Table Catalog and ruling styles are merged into the document, and all formats
in the catalog are reapplied in the document.
Color definitions
The template’s color definitions and views are merged into the document.
Reference pages
The template’s reference pages (except for FrameMath™ reference pages) are merged into the
document. If the template and the document both have a reference page with the same name,
168

Editing content
the reference page of the template replaces that of the document. To import the FrameMath
reference pages, select Math Definitions.
Document properties
The template’s custom marker types and footnote properties; the volume, chapter, page, paragraph, footnote, and table footnote numbering styles in the Numbering Properties dialog box;
the characters in the Allow Line Breaks After setting in the Text Options dialog box; and the
Feather settings in the Line Layout dialog box are merged into the document. The PDF Setup
settings (other than the bookmark settings) are also merged into the document. On Japanese-language systems, the rubi properties and kumihan rules (Japanese-language typesetting
rules) are also merged into the document.
Variable definitions
The template’s variable definitions are merged into the document.
Cross-reference formats
The template’s cross-reference formats are merged into the document, and internal
cross-references are updated.
Conditional tags settings
The template’s condition tags and Show/Hide settings are merged into the document.
Math definitions
The template’s equation size and font settings, custom math element definitions, and FrameMath reference pages are copied into the document. If any custom math elements in the document are deleted when the reference pages are merged, FrameMaker replaces the math
elements in equations with the name of the math element enclosed in question marks.
NOTE:In FrameMaker equations, the term “math element” refers to part of an expression. A math

element is not a structural element.
Combined fonts
On Asian-language systems, the specifications of combined fonts are merged into the document.
About formatting overrides
The formatting information for a document can come from format rules in element definitions and
from predefined formats stored in catalogs. It is possible for a document to have overrides to both
sources of information:
•

A format rule override is a deviation from a text element’s format rules. For example, if the rules
specify a paragraph format for an element and you apply a different format, or if the rules
specify boldface text and you change the text to italics, you are overriding the element’s format
rules.

169

Editing content
•

4

A format override is a deviation from a catalog format for text or a table. For example, a paragraph format may specify the Times font family. If you change some text that uses that format
to the Palatino font (without saving the change in the format), you are overriding the format.
Format rules often use a few catalog formats and specify format overrides to them to describe
many different formatting variations.

Generally, avoid using either type of override in your structured document. Let the document handle
the formatting automatically, and see your application developer if you’d like to change any of the
formatting properties.
If your document does have overrides, you can remove them throughout the document all at once
when you import and update.
IMPORTANT:If you need to remove both kinds of overrides from a document, import formats and
remove format overrides first, and then import element definitions and remove format rule overrides.
Removing the rule overrides last ensures that the elements conform to their format rules.

Find and remove overrides
You can use the Find option to search and remove format overrides at paragraph, character, and
table format levels.
1)

Select Edit > Find.

2)

From the Find pop-up menu, select Paragraph, Character, or Table format override.

3)

From the Change pop-up menu, select Remove Override.

4)

Click Find.

5)

For each instance of format override, click Change to remove the override.

Import properties from a template
You can import element definitions and other properties into your document from any FrameMaker
document. Typically, this other document is a template that you did not use for creating the document. (If you created your document from the appropriate template, you don’t need to import properties; the document already has the properties it needs.)
If your document’s template has been revised, import from the template again to update your document.
You can also import properties into all the files in a book at once.
RELATED LINKS:
Import formats into book files

170

Editing content

Equations

Placing and displaying equations
You can place an equation inline with paragraph text or display it in a paragraph of its own. In either
case, FrameMaker creates an anchored frame for the equation. You can position an equation with
other objects in an existing graphic frame, to annotate a graphic, for example. The graphic frames
that contain equations can be either anchored or unanchored.

A. Inline B. Display C. In a graphic with other objects
Inline and display equations in structured documents
An equation element provides a frame with an equation object into which you can enter mathematical expressions. Like an anchored frame for graphics, an equation frame is anchored to a specific
location in text.
You can insert an equation element inline with paragraph text or in a separate display paragraph.

171

Editing content

4

A. Inline equation B. Display equation
An equation element appears in the document structure where it is anchored to text, regardless of
the equation position on the page. In the Structure View, a square-cornered bubble with the snippet
 indicates an equation element. The equation itself is not part of the structure.
Equation element

If you export to SGML or XML, FrameMaker writes the equation to a separate graphics file (CGM
format). Then FrameMaker adds an entity reference to it from your SGML or XML file.
You can change the file format for equations using a read/write rule. If you change the file format to
MIF, FrameMaker keeps a track of equations and their respective file names. Saving the equation
multiple times, still saves it to its one file, instead of creating multiple files as in FrameMaker 9.
For example:

New behavior
Equation 1 is saved in file say eq1.mif
Editing the FrameMaker content and subsequently
saving the file, saves equation 1 to the same
eq1.mif.
FrameMaker does NOT create new files on every
save for the same equation.

Old behavior
Equation 1 is saved in file say eq1.mif
Editing the FrameMaker content and subsequently saving
the file, creates a new file say eq2.mif for the same
equation 1.
FrameMaker creates new files on every save for the same
equation.

Equations in graphic frames in structured documents
You can also place an equation in an anchored frame that’s already inserted for graphics. Do this to
combine the equation with graphic objects. If the anchored frame is an element, the element is part
of the document structure. However, the frame contents, including the equation, do not appear in
the structure.
An equation in an anchored frame with graphics sometimes produces unwanted results if you export
to SGML or XML. In general, if you plan to export to SGML or XML, place only one object in a
frame.

Equations pod overview
The Equations pod contains the commands to create and change equations. It also contains the
symbols, operators, functions, and other math elements you insert in equations. To display the pod,
click the Equations button at the upper-right in the document window.

172

Editing content

A. The Equations pop-up menu appears on every page. B. This part of the pod changes from page
to page. C. The names of the pages appear here, with the current page highlighted.
The Equations pod contains nine pages of math elements and commands. To display a page, click its
name at the top of the pod.
Symbols
Greek characters, atomic symbols, diacritical marks, and strings.
Operators
Roots, powers, signs, subscripts, superscripts, and logic symbols.
Large
Sums, products, integrals, intersections, and unions.
Delimiters
Parentheses, brackets, curly brackets, and substitution.
Relations
Equal, less than, greater than, similar to, subset of, superset of, and proportional to.
Calculus
Integrals, derivatives, partial derivatives, gradients, and limits.
Matrices
Matrices and matrix commands.
Functions
Trigonometric, hyperbolic, and logarithmic functions; commands for evaluating expressions;
and commands for creating and applying rules.
Positioning
Controls to adjust the position of an expression and the spacing around it, commands to
specify alignment, and commands to set and clear manual line breaks.

Create equations
To create an equation, insert an equation object in the document and then insert math elements in
the equation.
173

Editing content

4

TIP:When working with an equation, zoom in until it’s easy to read.

Create an inline equation
1)

Click in text where you want to insert the equation. If the text is in a rotated text frame, unrotate the frame first by selecting the rotated text frame and pressing Esc g 0 (zero).

2)

Choose Special > Equations, or click the Equations button at the right side of the document
window.

3)

On the Equations pod, choose one of the New Equation commands from the Equations pop-up
menu. Small, Medium, and Large specify the font sizes used in the new equation.
A new equation object appears as a question mark in a frame anchored below the line with the
insertion point. The first math element that you insert replaces the question mark prompt.
New inline equation

4)

Insert the math elements in the equation by typing the elements or by clicking items on the
Equations pod.
Inserted elements

5)

Choose Shrink-Wrap Equation from the Equations pop-up menu. This option shrinks the
frame around the equation and places the equation in the line of text at the anchor symbol.
Shrink-wrapped inline equation

174

Editing content
6)

If the equation seems too close to the text on either side, insert a space before or after the frame.
FrameMaker treats the frame that contains an inline equation as a character and doesn’t
provide extra space around it.

7)

If the equation is too tall for the line, open up more space above or below the line. Use the Line
Spacing pop-up menu on the formatting bar to turn off fixed line spacing.

Create an equation in a paragraph of its own (a display equation)
1)

Click in an empty paragraph.

2)

Apply a paragraph format from the Paragraph Catalog, or set up your own format. The paragraph format determines the alignment, vertical spacing, and any autonumber for the paragraph that contains the equation.
TIP:If you created the document from a book or report template, use the Equation paragraph

format. You can also copy this format to your document, but you’ll probably want to make some
changes (for example, to the Default Font and Spacing properties).
3)

Click the Equations button

at the right side of the document window.

4)

On the Equations pod, choose one of the New Equation commands from the Equations pop-up
menu. Small, Medium, and Large specify the font sizes used in the new equation.
A new equation object appears as a question mark in a frame anchored below the empty paragraph. The first math element you insert replaces the question mark prompt.
New equation in anchored frame

5)

Insert the math elements in the equation by typing the elements or by clicking items on the
Equations pod.

175

Editing content

4

Inserted elements

6)

Choose Shrink-Wrap Equation from the Equations pop-up menu. This option shrinks the
frame around the equation and places the equation in the empty paragraph.
Shrink-wrapped equation in its own paragraph

Create an equation in a graphic frame with other objects
1)

Click the Equations button

at the right side of the document window.

2)

Select a graphic frame or an object in a graphic frame.

3)

On the Equations pod, choose one of the New Equation commands from the Equations pop-up
menu. Small, Medium, and Large specify the font sizes used in the new equation.
A new equation object appears as a question mark inside the frame. The first math element you
insert replaces the question mark prompt.
New equation object

176

4)

Insert the math elements in the equation by typing the elements or by clicking items on the
Equations pod.

5)

To place the equation exactly where you want it, first select it by Control-clicking the equation.

Editing content
6)

Move the equation by doing one of the following:
•

Drag it with the mouse.

•

Move it with the arrow keys.

•

Position it precisely with the Graphics > Object Properties command.

RELATED LINKS:
Move an object
Create equations using the Equations pod

Insert math elements
An equation contains expressions made up of math elements—characters, text strings, operators,
and other mathematical elements from the Equations pod.

A. Alphanumeric character B. Text string C. Expression D. Operator
After you create an equation object, insert math elements in it by typing them or by clicking them
on the Equations pod. The Equations pod can be closed when you insert an item from the keyboard.
NOTE:Math equations support the Unicode text-encoding standard.

About the scope of operations
When you insert a math element in an equation, FrameMaker adjusts the mathematical syntax. The
result depends on the scope of operation—the selection or the location of the insertion point. For
example, when you insert x in a fraction, the result depends on whether the numerator, the denominator, or the entire fraction is selected.

If you multiply by x

The result is

or

177

Editing content

4

If you multiply by x

The result is

or

In the first example, only the 7 is multiplied by x. In the second example, FrameMaker adds parentheses to show that the entire expression 2y + 7 is multiplied by x. In the last example, the entire fraction is multiplied by x. The size of the insertion point in the first and last examples indicates the
scope.
Many mistakes in equations result from an incorrect scope of operation—having too little or too
much selected when inserting an element. Be careful to select the range you want before inserting an
element.
Insert a math element

1)

Select an expression or place the insertion point in an equation.

2)

Do any of the following:
•

To insert a math element by using the Equations pod, click the element.

•

To insert an alphanumeric character or a symbol that appears on the keyboard, type it.
You can type parentheses, brackets, plus signs, equal signs, and so on. If you type an open
parenthesis, FrameMaker inserts the closing parenthesis.

•

To insert an element by typing a backslash sequence, type a backslash (\) and the string
that identifies the element, and then press Return. For example, to insert the symbol for
infinity , type\infty and press Return.

•

Insert a custom math element.

If an element needs one or more operands, a question mark prompt appears for each
operand; otherwise, an insertion point appears. To move from one operand to another, press
Tab.
Insert a text string
A text string is a series of characters that is interpreted as a unit. Unlike characters that make up an
expression, the characters in a text string don’t usually appear in italics and aren’t multiplied
together.

178

Editing content
A. Text strings

Text strings have no mathematical meaning in FrameMaker. For example, evaluation commands
can evaluate the function tan but not the string “tan”.
1)

On the Symbols page of the Equations pod, click Start String. Two double quotation marks ("")
appear. You can also type an apostrophe (') or a double quotation mark (") to start the string.

2)

Type the text of the string. The quotation marks disappear, and the text appears as you type.
To insert a straight apostrophe or straight double quotation mark as part of the string, hold
down Control while pressing the key.

3)

Click End String on the Symbols page or press Return.

Insert, add, or edit a horizontal or vertical list of expressions
An equation object usually contains one equation or expression. You can set up a horizontal or
vertical list in which several expressions are contained in the same object. When you select a list, all
the expressions in the list are selected as one object.

A. Horizontal list B. Vertical list aligned on equal signs
FrameMaker aligns the expressions in the list automatically. When you move the list, all the expressions maintain their relative positions.
1)

Select the expression you want to be the first item in the list or to add to a list.

2)

On the Operators page of the Equations pod, click the horizontal list element or vertical list
element . To add a math element, type the elements or click items on the Equations pod. A
horizontal or vertical list appears. The selected expression appears as the first item in the list.
A second item appears in the list as a question mark prompt.

179

Editing content

4

Before clicking

After clicking

In the first example, a horizontal list is inserted. In the second example, a vertical list is inserted, and
the selected expression becomes the first item in the list. In the last example, a vertical list is inserted
as part of a larger expression.
Insert symbols
The Symbols page on the Equations pod contains the Greek alphabet, other symbols, and diacritical
marks.
The Symbols page doesn’t include Greek letters that have Roman-alphabet equivalents, such as the
uppercase alpha (A). The following examples show the result of clicking on the Symbols page.

Before clicking

After clicking

Diacritical marks appear on the element to the left of the insertion point or on the selected expression. Click the dot or prime button once for each dot or prime diacritical mark you want to insert.
NOTE:To interpret and mathematically manipulate a summation, product, or partial differential

element, insert the element from the Large page or Calculus page. Do not insert from the Symbols page.
Elements from the Symbols page are not evaluated.

180

Editing content
Insert operators
The Operators page on the Equations pod contains commonly used operators, roots, powers, signs,
subscripts, superscripts, and logic symbols.
If an expression is selected when you insert the operator, the expression becomes the first operand.
The following examples show the result of clicking the plus sign
or the division operator on
the Operators page.

Before clicking

After clicking

You can represent the division operator as a slash (/), a horizontal bar

, or a division sign .

FrameMaker can evaluate exponents mathematically, but not superscripts.

A. Superscript B. Exponent
Insert large elements
The Large page on the Equations pod contains sums, products, integrals, intersections, and unions.
If an expression is selected when you insert a large element, the expression becomes the first
operand. The following examples show the result of clicking the summation symbol on the Large
page.

Before clicking

After clicking

181

Editing content

4

Before clicking

After clicking

You can add an operand after inserting a math element from the Large page.
Insert delimiters
The Delimiters page contains delimiters such as parentheses, brackets, and curly brackets.
If an expression is selected when you insert a pair of delimiters, the expression is placed inside the
delimiters. The following examples show the result of clicking the parentheses on the Delimiters
page.

Before clicking

After clicking

You can also represent parentheses as brackets ([ ]) or curly brackets ({ }).
Insert relations
The Relations page contains relation symbols such as =, <, >, , , , , and .
All relation symbols—except the binary equal sign
—apply to the character to the left or right of
the insertion point or to the selection. When you insert a relation symbol between multiplied
elements, it applies to the elements on either side of the insertion point.
Binary equal signs
appear to the right of the current expression (as shown in the second
example). When the insertion point or selection is in a subscript or superscript, the equal sign
appears in the subscript or superscript.

Before clicking

182

After clicking

Editing content

Before clicking

After clicking

Insert a binary equal sign at the insertion point
1)

Press Esc m =

Before clicking

After clicking

Insert calculus elements
The Calculus page contains integrals, derivatives, partial derivatives, gradients, and the limit function.
If an expression is selected when you insert the calculus element, the expression becomes the first
operand. The following examples show the result of clicking the integral symbol on the Calculus
page.

Before clicking

After clicking

You can change the position of operands and add operands.
Insert matrices

The Matrices page contains elements for matrices ranging in size from 1 by 1 to 3 by 3. After creating
a matrix, you can add rows and columns.
If an expression is selected when you insert the matrix element, the expression becomes the first cell
in the matrix.
183

Editing content

4

Before clicking

After clicking

Insert functions
The Functions page contains trigonometric, hyperbolic, and logarithmic functions, and also the
sign, limit, and general functions.
FrameMaker places functions at the insertion point or at the selection. When an expression is
selected, the expression becomes the argument of the function—except for the limit and general
functions and . The following examples show the result of clicking the sin function on the
Functions page.

Before clicking

After clicking

Insert a custom math element
In addition to inserting math elements that are built in FrameMaker, you can insert custom math
elements that have been defined for a document.
Custom math elements have no mathematical meaning in FrameMaker. For example, a custom
math element for an operator is treated as an operator in an equation. However, FrameMaker cannot
evaluate it.

184

1)

On the Equations pod, choose Insert Math Element from the Equations pop-up menu.

2)

Select the element name and click Insert.

Editing content

Shrinkwrap or unwrap an equation
Shrinkwrapping an equation shrinks the surrounding anchored frame so that it’s large enough for
the equation. The operation changes the frame anchoring position to At Insertion Point, and places
the insertion point after the frame.
Before shrinkwrapping

After shrinkwrapping

Shrinkwrap an equation when you finish working with it so that the equation takes minimal space
and aligns with the baseline of the surrounding text. Unwrap an equation to enlarge the anchored
frame for easy editing.
1)

Click in the equation or select its frame.

2)

On the Equations pod, choose Shrink-Wrap Equation or Unwrap Equation from the Equations pop-up menu. The edges of a shrinkwrapped equation sometimes do not appear
onscreen. They do appear in the printed document.

Edit equations
You can edit an equation as you edit text—adding, changing, rearranging, and removing math
elements, and cutting, copying, and pasting them. As you edit an equation, the syntax of the equation
is adjusted as necessary.
You can change a matrix—add or delete rows and columns, delete brackets, and change row height
and column width. You can also choose among several representations for some math elements such
as parentheses. You can add operands to others such as integrals and summations.

185

Editing content

4

If your equation is shrinkwrapped, unwrap the equation before editing it. This makes the anchored
frame full-sized again, giving you more room to work.

NOTE:To edit a rotated equation, first restore the equation or text frame to its unrotated position by

pressing Esc g 0 (zero).
Extend a selection using the keyboard
1)

Press the spacebar. The selection expands to include the next higher expression. The following
example shows the result of pressing the spacebar repeatedly.

Original selection

Pressed once

Pressed twice

Change the selection
1)

Do one of the following:
•

To change the selection to the next subexpression on the right, press the Right Arrow key.

•

To change the selection to the next subexpression on the left, press the Left Arrow key.

•

To change the selection to the next question mark prompt, press Tab.

Replace or delete a math element or equation

186

1)

Select the element you want to delete and press Delete. A question mark prompt replaces the
element.

2)

Do one of the following:
•

To replace the element, click the Equations pod or type to insert the replacement.

•

To delete the element, press Delete again. FrameMaker removes any elements that are no
longer necessary—for example, a plus sign or parentheses.

Editing content
•

Control-click the equation to select the equation, and press Delete.

Remove delimiters
After entering or editing an equation, you sometimes end up with extra delimiters—parentheses,
curly brackets, and brackets. You can remove extra delimiters. If you later use evaluation commands,
FrameMaker evaluates the equation as if the delimiters are still present.
•

To remove all delimiters, select the expression. On the Delimiters page of the Equations pod,
click Remove Parentheses.

Before clicking

•

After clicking

To remove one delimiter, place the insertion point to the right of the delimiter and press
Delete. If the delimiter has a mate, such as the left parenthesis between a and b in the example,
the mate is also removed.

Before

After

Toggle an element format
You can represent some math elements in more than one way. For example, delimiters can appear
as , , or
. Division can appear as
,
, or .
1)

Select the entire element.

2)

On the Operators, Large, Delimiters, or Calculus page of the Equations pod, click Toggle
Format. The command is the same on all four pages and operates on any element with multiple
formats. Click more than once to get the format you want in some cases.

Add an operand to a math element
Radical symbols, gradient symbols, and logarithms can have one or two operands. Integrals and
other symbols on the Large and Calculus pages can have one, two, or three operands.

187

Editing content

4

Operands

You can add operands to these elements without starting over.
1)

Click or select anywhere in the expression with the element.

2)

Click Add Operand on the Large or Calculus page. A question mark prompt appears where you
specify the new operand.

Change matrices
You can change the number of rows or columns in a matrix and add or remove brackets around the
matrix. You can allow the column width to vary from column to column, depending on the contents,
or specify that all columns are equal width. Similarly, you can allow the row height to vary from row
to row.
You can also transpose a matrix and perform matrix algebra.
•

To add a row or column to a matrix, place the insertion point in the matrix. On the Matrices
page of the Equations pod, choose Add Row or Add Column from the Matrix Commands
pop-up menu.

Before Add Column

After Add Column

Add Row adds a row at the bottom. Add Column adds a column at the far right.

188

•

To delete a row or column from a matrix, select the row or column and press Delete.

•

To add or remove brackets around a matrix, select the entire matrix. On the Matrices page of
the Equations pod, click Add/Remove Brackets.

•

To change the row height or column width in a matrix, select the matrix. On the Matrices page
of the Equations pod, choose All Equal or Proportional from the Matrix Row Height or Matrix
Column Width pop-up menu.

Editing content
Equal row heights (left) and Proportional row heights (right)

If you choose Proportional, each row is tall enough to hold the tallest cell in the row. Each column
is wide enough to hold the widest cell in the column. If you choose All Equal, each row is tall enough
to hold the tallest cell in the entire matrix. Each column is wide enough to hold the widest cell in the
entire matrix.

Create and define math elements

If you need a math element that doesn’t appear on the Equations pod, you can create a custom
element—for example, a new operator such as . However, FrameMaker cannot evaluate custom
math elements mathematically.
To display a built-in element on the pod differently in your document, you can redefine the element.
For example, you can redefine the asin(inverse sine) function so it appears as sin–1. You can redefine
the appearance of a built-in element, but you can’t change its type.
You can also import math element definitions from another document.
Custom math element definitions are stored on one or more reference pages whose name begins
with FrameMath. Each definition is a text line in an unanchored graphic frame whose name is the
element name.

A. Graphic frame B. Text line
RELATED LINKS:
Add text to graphics
Use reference frames on reference pages
Change equation fonts throughout a document

189

Editing content

4

Math element types
A math element type indicates how the element behaves in relation to other elements around it. For
example, a plus sign (+) has the type infix, which means that it has two operands, one to the left and
one to the right.
You can define custom math elements of the following types.

Type

Example

Number of operands

Atom

None

Delimiter

One

Function

One, to the right of the element

Infix

Two, to the left and the right of the element

Large

Up to three, above, below, and to the right of the element

Limit

Up to two, below and to the right of the element

Prefix

One, to the left of the element

Postfix

One, to the right of the element

Vertical list

Two, one above the other (The text line that defines a custom
vertical list is used as a separator between list items.)

You cannot define custom math elements of the following types.

Type
Derivative

190

Example

Editing content

Type

Example

Diacritical mark
Horizontal list
Matrix

Root

Script

Substitution

Vertical division bar

Define a custom math element or change a built-in math element definition
1)

Choose View > Reference Pages and display a FrameMath reference page.
If the document doesn’t contain a FrameMath reference page, display a reference page and
then choose Special > Add Reference Page. Name the new page FrameMath1. Capitalize the
letters F and M as shown.

2)

Use the Graphic Frame tool to draw an unanchored graphic frame on the page.

3)

In the Frame Name dialog box, enter a name for the math element. If you are redefining a
built-in element, enter that element name.

4)

Use the Text Line tool to add a text line in the graphic frame.

5)

Create the math element in the text line using the following guidelines:
•

You can type any characters in the text line, and you can change the character format.
You can also move the characters by using micropositioning shortcuts.

•

For all math elements except delimiters, the text line represents just the mathematical
symbol, not the operands. When you later insert the element in an equation,
FrameMaker places the operands in the appropriate places, based on the type of math
element. For example, a large element, such as a summation or an integral sign, has up to
three operands—one above, one below, and one to the right of the symbol.

191

Editing content
•

4
A custom delimiter can contain only one operand, even though some built-in delimiters
contain two or three. To indicate the location of the operand, insert a space in the text
line. If you do not insert a space in the text line, FrameMaker places the operand between
two copies of the delimiter.

A. Characters in delimiter. B.Space indicates the operand.

•

FrameMaker uses the first text line in the frame for the custom math element. Make sure
that only one text line exists in the frame.

6)

Select the graphic frame.

7)

On the Equations pod, choose Add Definition To Catalog from the Equations pop-up menu.

8)

If you’re defining a custom math element, choose an element type from the pop-up menu, and
click Add.

Find the name of a math element
1)

Place the insertion point in an equation.

2)

On the Equations pod, choose Insert Math Element from the Equations pop-up menu.

3)

Turn off Show Custom Only, and then scroll through the element names to find the one you
want.

4)

Click Cancel.

Change or delete a custom math element definition
1)

2)

192

Display the FrameMath reference page that contains the math element by doing one of the
following:
•

If the custom math element appears in an equation, select the element, and choose
Update Definition from the Equations pop-up menu on the Equations pod. Then click
Go To Frame.

•

If you haven’t inserted the custom math element into an equation, choose View > Reference Pages. Then display the FrameMath reference page you want.

Do one of the following:

Editing content
•

Edit the text line that defines the math element. When you display a body page again,
FrameMaker uses the modified definition, and shrinkwraps the equations again.

•

Delete the graphic frame. If the element appears in an equation, FrameMaker displays the
element name, surrounded by question marks, instead of the element.

Position math elements in an equation
FrameMaker positions math elements according to their mathematical meaning in an equation.
Sometimes you want to microposition elements—reposition them so they’re closer to or farther from
other elements in the equation.
Before and after micropositioning

You can also control the amount of white space on each side of an element.

A. Default spacing B. Space added to the left and right C. Space removed from the left and right
1)

On the Positioning page of the Equations pod, do one of the following:
•

To position a selected expression, click a Micropositioning arrow. Click as many times as
necessary. (Each click moves an expression one pixel on the screen.) Zoom in for greater
precision.

Micropositioning arrows

•

To remove micropositioning, click the button at the center of the Microposition area

.
193

Editing content

4

•

To inspect the position offsets and adjust them numerically, click Position Settings. The
exact offsets appear in the Microposition Offset area of the Math Element Position
Settings dialog box. To adjust the position, enter values in the Microposition Offset area
and click Set.

•

To adjust white space, click a plus sign (+) to add white space or a minus sign (–) to
remove it. Click as many times as necessary. Each click adds or subtracts one pixel of
space. Zoom in for greater precision.

NOTE:To change the spacing around a math element of type infix, prefix, postfix, or delimiter,

adjust the space around the adjacent math elements instead. For example, to add space on either
side of the plus sign in the expression a+b, selecta. Add space to the right. Then selectb. Add space
to the left.
•

To adjust spacing values, click Position Settings. The exact spacing appears in the Spacing
area of the Math Element Position Settings dialog box. To adjust the spacing values, enter
values in the Spacing area, and click Set. To restore the default spacing values, click the
button at the center of the Spacing area .

Adjust the spacing values for a math element wherever it appears
You can update some math element definitions—infix, prefix, postfix, large, scripts, and the division
bar—with new spacing. When you do, FrameMaker adjusts the spacing around the element wherever it appears in the document and rewraps the equations.
You can also change the spread—the space between characters—uniformly in all small, medium,
and large equations.
1)

After you adjust the spacing around the element in an equation, select the element.

2)

On the Equations pod, choose Update Definition from the Equations pop-up menu.

3)

Do one of the following:
•

To update the spacing for the element throughout the document, click Update.

•

To reset the spacing to the default, click Get Default.

Set line breaks and align equations
You can control equation breaks across lines and alignment of the lines in a multiline equation, or
of the items in a list or matrix. You can also align several equations with one another, even if they
appear in different anchored frames.

194

Editing content
Aligned along left side of equal signs

You can manipulate equation objects as you do other objects. You can automatically and manually
align items in a vertical list and lines in a multiline equation. Manual alignment points override automatic alignment.
Aligned on left side and at manual alignment point

You can align the items in a horizontal list along their tops, bottoms, or baselines.
Baseline-aligned

You can also align the cells in each row of a matrix along their tops, bottoms, or baselines. You can
align the cells in each column at the right, left, or center, or along equal signs.
Aligned along:

A. Baselines B. Centers
RELATED LINKS:
Copy and arrange objects

195

Editing content

4

Insert, add, or edit a horizontal or vertical list of expressions

Change equation line breaking
When an equation breaks across lines, the entire equation remains in a single anchored frame. You
can set where an equation breaks across lines automatically. When you change the line-break width,
the equation is reformatted to the new width.
Original equation

Equation set to break at 1.25"

You can also force a line break at a specific location in the equation. However, don’t use manual line
breaks to create separate equations. Instead, insert a vertical list of expressions.
You can change line breaking in these ways:
•

To change the automatic line break width, click in the equation or select any part of it. Choose
Graphics > Object Properties. Edit the value in the Automatic Line Break After box, and click
Set. The value is preset to the width of the equation frame.

•

To insert a manual line break, click where you want the equation to break into two lines. On
the Positioning page of the Equations pod, choose Set Manual from the Line Breaking pop-up
menu. A line-break symbol appears at the insertion point when text symbols are visible.
Manual line break

•

196

To remove a manual line break, select the part of the equation that contains the line-break
symbol. On the Positioning page of the Equations pod, choose Clear Manual from the Line
Breaking pop-up menu.

Editing content
Align display equations
The format of the paragraph that contains the equation controls the alignment (left, center, or right)
of a display equation.
Paragraph alignment set to Center

1)

Click in the paragraph that contains the equation (not in the equation itself).

2)

Choose the alignment from the Alignment pop-up menu in the formatting bar or in the Paragraph Designer.

Set automatic alignment for a vertical list or multiline equation
1)

Click in the equation or list.

2)

On the Positioning page of the Equations pod, choose an item from the Left/Right pop-up
menu. When you choose Left Of = or Right Of =, the lines are aligned along one side of an equal
sign. A line with no equal sign is aligned along its left side.

Set a manual alignment point for a multiline equation or for an item in a vertical list
1)

2)

Do one of the following:
•

Click in the first line of a multiline equation where you want subsequent lines to align.

•

Click in a vertical list item where you want the item to align with the rest of the list.

On the Positioning page of the Equations pod, choose Set Manual from the Left/Right pop-up
menu. A manual alignment symbol appears at the insertion point when text symbols are
visible. Subsequent lines of a multiline equation are left aligned with the manual alignment
point. A vertical list item aligns with other items in the list at the manual alignment point.

Clear a manual alignment point
1)

Select the part of the equation that contains the manual alignment point.

2)

On the Positioning page of Equations pod, choose Clear Manual from the Left/Right pop-up
menu. You can also clear a manual alignment point by setting another.

197

Editing content

4

Align items in a horizontal list
1)

Click in the list.

2)

On the Positioning page of the Equations pod, choose an item from the Up/Down pop-up
menu.

Align cells in a matrix
1)

Click in the matrix.

2)

On the Positioning page of the Equations pod, choose an item from the Up/Down pop-up
menu or from the Left/Right pop-up menu. The Left/Right and Up/Down commands affect
the whole matrix. To align individual cells, use micropositioning.

Check alignment settings for a horizontal or vertical list, or for a matrix
1)

2)

Do one of the following to select the entire list or matrix:
•

Drag through the list or matrix.

•

Place the insertion point in the matrix and press the spacebar repeatedly.

On the Positioning Page of the Equations pod, click Position Settings.

Left-, center-, or right-align equations in a frame
You can align several equation objects with one another in a graphic frame, just as you align other
objects. You can also align several equation objects along a manual alignment point, even when
they’re in separate graphic frames.
Equations aligned at manual alignment points

FrameMaker maintains the alignment of the equation objects as you edit the equations. For example,
if two equations are left aligned, the left alignment is maintained as the equations expand or shrink.
1)

Select the equations to align by Control-clicking the first equation; Control+Shift-click the
other equations.
Make sure that the last equation you select is the one you want to align with.

2)
198

Choose Graphics > Align.

Editing content
3)

Select the left/right alignment you want, and click Align.

Align equations along a point
1)

Set the manual alignment point in one of the equations to align.
If you don’t set a manual alignment point, FrameMaker aligns an equation on the left.

2)

Click in the equation and choose Graphics > Object Properties.

3)

Choose Manual from the Alignment pop-up menu and specify the location of the alignment
point within the frame in the Alignment Point Offset area. The left offset is the distance from
the left edge of the frame to the manual alignment point.
Specifying the top offset precisely is unnecessary. You can move the equation up or down later,
just as you do any other object.

4)

Click Set.

5)

Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each equation you want to align. Use the same distance from the
left edge for each equation, but change the top offset to position the equation vertically in the
frame. If the equations you’re aligning are in different anchored frames, make sure that the left
edges align with one another.

Change font settings in equations
A document contains font settings that apply to all equations in it. These settings determine the font
sizes and spacing for small, medium, and large equations. They also determine the character format
used for Greek characters and for symbols, functions, numbers, strings, and variables.
You can change the preset size of an entire equation. You can also change the character format of
individual math elements—for example, to use color or a special font.
You can also change the font sizes and character formats used for all equations in a document.
Change the character format in individual equations
You can’t change the spread, stretch, superscript, subscript, underline, overline, strikethrough,
change bar, or pair kerning properties for any element. You also can’t change the font family for
individual Greek characters and symbols and for some operators.
•

To change the preset size or color of an equation, click in the equation, choose Graphics >
Object Properties, and do one of the following:
–

To change the equation size, choose a size from the Size pop-up menu, and click Set. If
the equation is shrinkwrapped, FrameMaker rewraps it.

–

To change the equation color, choose a color from the Color pop-up menu, and click Set.

199

Editing content

4

•

To change character format, select the element or expression, and change as you do for text.

•

To create a superscript or subscript, insert the appropriate operator.

•

To change the spread of characters, microposition them by using the positioning page of the
Equations pod.

•

To place a line over or under an expression, use the diacritical marks on the Symbols page of
the Equations pod.

Change equation fonts throughout a document
You can change the font size and spacing for all small, medium, and large equations in a document.
When you make global font changes, FrameMaker reformats and rewraps all shrinkwrapped equations in the document.
Greek characters and symbols in equations normally appear in the Symbol font. You can use fonts
such as Mathematical Pi and Universal Greek if these fonts are installed on your system.
Functions, numbers, and strings normally appear in Times New Roman or Times. Variables
normally appear in italic. You can change the character format of each of these kinds of elements.
For example, you can display all elements in Helvetica, with functions in italic and variables in bold.
NOTE:Don’t delete formats from the Character Catalog if you’re using them to specify the character

format of math elements. If you delete these character formats, all equations in the document are reformatted using the default font.
Use Equation Sizes from the Equations pop-up menu on the Equations pod for the following change:
•

To change equation fonts throughout the document, do one of the following:
–

Specify the font sizes and spread, and click Set. Spread is expressed as a percentage of the
font size. Positive spread values cause wider spacing around elements; negative values
cause narrower spacing.

–

Click Get Defaults.

•

To change the font for Greek characters and symbols, choose one of the available fonts from
the Math Symbols pop-up menu, and click Set.

•

To change the character format for functions, numbers, strings, and variables, first create the
character format you want. Then choose the character format from the Functions, Numbers,
Strings, or Variables pop-up menu, and click Set. FrameMaker displays the format you created
in the pop-up menus.

Evaluating equations
After you create an expression or equation, you can transform it by changing its mathematical representation. For example, you can multiply polynomials, factor terms, simplify expressions, and
combine fractions.
200

Editing content

Original selection

Expanded
Multiplied out

Multiplied out again

You can also evaluate equations by substituting values and performing computations.

Original selection

Expanded

Value substituted
Result computed

Transform or evaluate an expression
1)

Select the expression, or part of it.

2)

Choose a command on the Matrices or Functions page of the Equations pod. For example,
select an expression and then choose Multiply Out from the Multiplication pop-up menu on
the Functions page.

3)

To transform or evaluate an expression, use the commands on the Matrix Commands pop-up
menu of the Matrices page and the commands on the six pop-up menus of the Functions page.

RELATED LINKS:
Change matrices

Matrix Commands pop-up menu
Matrix Transpose
Transposes the rows and columns of a selected matrix.

201

Editing content

4

Selected matrix

After transposing

Matrix Algebra
Performs matrix multiplication and addition, and evaluates dot and cross products in a
selected matrix.

Selected matrix (or matrices)

After matrix algebra

After performing matrix algebra, you can use the Simplify command to combine like terms.

202

Editing content
Addition pop-up menu
Add Fractions
Adds selected fractions, expressing the result as a single fraction. This command also combines
like terms.

Selected fraction

After adding

If the selected expression contains the sum of more than two fractions, Add Fractions adds
only the first two. Use this command repeatedly to combine all the fractions.

Selected expression

Added once

Added twice

Order Sum
Arranges polynomials in decreasing powers of a selected variable.

Before ordering

After ordering

203

Editing content

4

Order Sum Reverse
Arranges polynomials in increasing powers of a selected variable. In the following example,
you select an x—any x—before choosing Order Sum Reverse.

Before ordering

After ordering

Multiplication pop-up menu
Use the Multiplication pop-up menu on the Functions page to factor terms, multiply out expressions, and distribute multiplication and division over addition.
Factor
Factors a selected term out of a product.

Before factoring

After factoring

Factor Some
Factors a selected term from only those terms that contain it.

Before factoring

After factoring

Multiply Out
Simplifies the selected expression, distributes multiplication over addition, and expands a
selected term raised to a positive integral power.

204

Editing content

Selected expression

After multiplying

The Simplify command also simplifies the selected expression.
Multiply Out Once
Multiplies the first pair of factors on the left side of a selected expression.

Selected expression

After multiplying

If you use this command several times, the results appear in a different form.
Distribute
Performs a variety of operations depending on the expression you select, as shown in the
following examples:
•

Distributes division over addition.

Selected expression

After distributing

Use the Add Fractions command to perform the reverse operation.
•

Distributes multiplication over addition.

Selected expression

After distributing

Use the Factor command to perform the reverse operation.

205

Editing content
•

4
Transforms products and quotients involving radicals and exponents into a single
expression raised to a power.

Selected expression

After distributing

Use the Simplify command to perform the reverse operation.
Distribute Over Equality
Performs the same operation on both sides of an equal sign.

Selected expression

After distributing

Division pop-up menu
Long Division
Performs long division in a fraction that contains a polynomial numerator and denominator.
In the following example, you select an x—any x—before choosing Long Division. You select
an x in the fraction of the first result and choose Long Division again to obtain the second
result.

Before dividing

Divided once

206

Editing content

Divided twice

Remove Division
Converts division to multiplication in a selected expression by changing positive exponents in
a denominator to negative and negative exponents in a denominator to positive.

Selected expression

After removing division

To convert negative exponents to division operators, use the Remove Negative Powers
command.
Remove Division 1 Level
Converts division to multiplication, as Remove Division does, but applies only to the first level
of operators.

Selected expression

After removing division

To convert the first level of negative exponents into division operators, use the Remove Negative Powers 1 Level command.
Remove Negative Powers
Converts negative exponents to positive in a selected expression by replacing multiplication
with division and division with multiplication.

207

Editing content

4

Selected expression

After removing negative powers

Remove Negative Powers 1 Level
Converts negative exponents to positive, as Remove Negative Powers does, but applies only to
the first level. If the selected expression has no negative exponents at the first level, this
command has no effect.

Selected expression

After removing negative powers

(no effect)

Evaluation pop-up menu
Number Crunch
Changes integers to floating-point numbers in a selected expression and then evaluates the
expression.

Selected expression

208

After number crunch

Editing content

Selected expression

After number crunch

Use the Show All Digits command to show up to 15 decimal places in a floating-point number.
Number Crunch displays NaN (Not a Number) for operations that result in undefined values.
It displays Infinity for operations that result in a value too large to calculate. Small numbers can
sometimes be evaluated to zero.

Selected expression

After number crunch

Show All Digits
Shows the full internal accuracy of a floating-point number.

Selected number

After showing all digits

Evaluate
Evaluates the selected expression. The operations performed depend on the type of expression
selected, as shown in the following examples:
•

Rewrites an expression raised to a power less than 20 as a product.

Selected expression

•

After evaluating

Computes the factorial of an integer. If the result is too large to calculate, the result
appears as Infinity.

209

Editing content

4

Selected expression

•

Computes the determinant of a 1-by-1 or 2-by-2 matrix.

Selected expression

•

After evaluating

Extracts a term from a sum or product.

Selected expression

After evaluating

•

Evaluates a substitution just as the Evaluate Substitution command does.

•

Rewrites an Evaluate Between operator as a difference.

Selected expression

•

After evaluating

Rewrites the logarithm of a product as a sum of logarithms and rewrites a logarithm of a
power as a product.

Selected expression

210

After evaluating

After evaluating

Editing content

Selected expression

•

Rewrites a logarithm to a base in terms of natural logarithms.

Selected expression

•

After evaluating

After evaluating

Rewrites a choice function in terms of factorials.

Selected expression

After evaluating

Evaluate Substitution
Performs a specified substitution and then simplifies the expression. When an Evaluate
Between operator is selected, this command rewrites the expression as a difference.

Selected expression

After evaluating

Evaluate Integrals
Rewrites a selected integral with a polynomial integrand. This command converts a definite
integral into an indefinite integral evaluated between the upper and lower bounds. Use Evaluate Integrals several times to integrate a polynomial fully.

211

Editing content

4

Selected expression

Evaluated once

Evaluated twice

Evaluate Derivatives
Evaluates a selected derivative, applying the chain rule to complex expressions when necessary.
This command evaluates a partial derivative only when all dependencies are explicitly written.
This command treats elements in a total derivative as if they depended on the variable of differentiation. Use the Evaluate command to expand an nth derivative before using Evaluate Derivatives to evaluate it.

Before

After

Evaluate Derivatives 1 Level
Evaluates only the first level of a selected derivative.

Before

212

After

Editing content
Rules pop-up menu
Use the Rules pop-up menu on the Functions page to store and apply rules that transform expressions.
For example, use Enter Rule to store a rule such as a = a + 3. Then use Apply Rule to substitute a +
3 for a in another expression.
Enter Rule
Stores a rule for substituting one expression for another. Select the expression you want to
store as a rule before you choose Enter Rule. You can store only one rule at a time.
Designate Dummy
Designates a selected term to be a dummy variable. Use a dummy variable in a rule to substitute
the expression on the right side of the rule for any variable, not just the variable explicitly
named on the left. A dummy variable appears in boldface. For example, if you designate x in
the rule x = a 2– as a dummy variable, you can substitute a 2– or x for any variable in an expression.
Select the term you want to be a dummy variable before you choose Designate Dummy. Then
use the Apply Rule command to replace a selected expression with the expression assigned to
the dummy variable.
Apply Rule
Substitutes one term or set of terms for another in a selected expression, using the rule stored
with the Enter Rule command.

Rule entered
Selected expression

After rule is applied

Before you apply a rule that contains a dummy variable, select the term you want the variable
to replace. In the following example, x is the dummy variable in the rule.

Rule entered

Before rule is applied

213

Editing content

4

After rule is applied

Other Rewrites pop-up menu
Simplify
Simplifies the selected expression. To evaluate fractions that involve infinity or division by
zero, use the Number Crunch command instead of Simplify.
The operations performed depend on the type of expression selected, as shown in the following
examples:
•

Performs integer arithmetic.

Selected expression

After simplifying

When the result is too large to calculate, it appears as Infinity.
•

Groups terms in a sum or product.

Selected expression

•

214

Divides out common factors in a fraction.

After simplifying

Editing content

Selected expression

After simplifying

Use the Remove Negative Powers command to remove negative powers from the result.
•

Interprets the complex number i, represented by the Greek letter iota .

Selected expression

•

After simplifying

Distributes exponentiation across multiplication and division.

Selected expression

Simplifying

x produces

rather than

After simplifying

.

Simplify Some
Simplifies the selected expression, as the Simplify command does, but does not multiply fractions.

Selected expression

After simplifying

215

Editing content

4

Isolate Term
Isolates a selected expression on one side of the equal sign. This command does not combine
terms or solve for the selected expression.

Selected expression

After isolating term

Expand First Term
Expands the first term of a selected summation or product.

Selected expression

After expanding

Expand All Terms
Expands all terms of a selected summation or product.

Selected expression

216

After expanding

Editing content

Selected expression

After expanding

Markers
FrameMaker markers provide you multiple ways in which you can mark your documents. You can
choose from pre-defined markers, such as Author, Comment, Conditional Tags, ContextString,
Cross-Ref, Equation, Glossary; or create custom markers.
The Markers pod makes it easier to work with and troubleshoot hundreds of markers in a long document or book files. You can display all the markers in the current document, all open documents,
selected file, or a book.

Add a marker
For example, to add a marker of Comment type:
1)

Place the cursor in the document where you want to insert a comment.

2)

Choose View > Pods > Markers to display the Markers pod if not already open.

3)

Click the Insert icon.

4)

Choose Comment from the Marker type box.

5)

Type your comment in the Marker Text text box and click New Marker.

6)

Save document.

NOTE:You can enter a tab character in marker text by typing either \t or the hexadecimal code \x08.

However, if you generate a list of markers, only tabs entered as hexadecimal codes appear. If you
generate an index of markers, only tabs entered as \t appear.
To add a marker to a structured document:
1)

Choose Special > Marker.

2)

Select a marker element in the Element Catalog and click Insert.

3)

Choose a marker type from the pop-up menu. You can use any predefined marker type except
Conditional Tags. You can also define your own marker types.

217

Editing content

4

NOTE:For structured documents, consult your developer before changing a marker type. Your

document may have a separate element defined for each marker type you’ll need.
4)

If the Attributes for New Element dialog box appears, enter attribute values for the marker
element and click Insert Element.
If no marker element is available at the location you want, you might use an invalid element.
After inserting the element, talk to your developer about making the element valid at this location.

Generate a list of markers
For example, to generate a list of all your Comment markers:
1)

Select Special > List Of > Markers to display the Set Up List of Markers dialog box.

2)

Select the Comment marker type from the right pop-up menu and click the left arrow to
transfer it into the Include Markers of Type list on the left.

3)

Check the Create Hypertext links checkbox.

4)

Click the Set button. All your Comment type markers are listed in a separate window.

Delete a marker
1)

Select the marker from the Markers pod and click the Delete icon. The marker is deleted from
the document.

Create a custom marker
You can also define custom markers for single-sourcing or automation. For example, you can use
custom markers to mark text that can be extracted into a separate reference guide. You can mark
graphic objects that require special processing, such as conversion from one format to another. You
can then use a script to automatically extract all those graphics marked with the custom marker for
further processing.

218

1)

Choose View > Pods > Markers.

2)

Click the Insert Icon.

3)

From the Marker Type combo box, select Edit.

4)

Type a name for the custom marker in the Edit Custom Marker Type box.

5)

Click Add and click Done. The new Marker type is added to the list of markers.

Editing content

Add a custom marker to your document
1)

From the Markers pod, click Insert.

2)

Select the custom marker type.

3)

Type the marker text and click New Marker. A custom marker gets added to your document.

Publish options
When you use the multi-channel publishing feature of FrameMaker, you get several options that
enable you to streamline online Help publishing.
Pagination with Page Break marker
Using the options in the Publish Options menu, you can avoid the traditional ways of having to
define custom markers for pagination and topic naming. You can add Page Break markers to denote
the topics that should be converted as separate Help topics, and define their topic names.

Add Page Break marker
1)

Click the heading text, and select Special > Publish Options > Apply Page Break Marker.

2)

In the Page Break Marker dialog box, enter the topic title. The file name is automatically populated based on the title text that you enter.
For example, if you enter the topic title as FrameMaker Publish options, the file is
named FrameMaker_Publish_options.htm.
However, you have the option to change the file name in the Filename text box.

Apply No Page Break Marker
You can also specify a marker to enforce that a page does not break at a defined location. For
example, you require to keep two closely related headings on the same page. In this case, you specify
a No Page Break Marker at the top of the second heading.
1)

Click the heading text of the second heading.

2)

Select Special > Publish Options > Apply No Page Break Marker.

The marker text for the newly created marker is . This indicates that the selected heading
will appear on the same page as the previous heading.

219

Editing content

4

Remove all Page Break markers
You can remove all the Page Break markers in a document.
1)

Open the document from which you need to remove all the page break markers.

2)

Select Special > Publish Options > Remove All Page Break Markers.

Context-sensitive Help marker
To create context-sensitive Help, you need to add markers in your documentation that the product
developers can link to from the corresponding parts of the product. The CSH (context-sensitive
help) Marker feature in FrameMaker allows you to apply TopicAlias markers in your documentation. The CSH markers are then used by the publisher to add anchors in the publish output. The
publisher also creates a map file that the product developers use to link to the anchors in the documentation.
NOTE: For best results, ensure that you are applying the map IDs to heading styles that you identified

for pagination.
Context-sensitive Help markers are used in the following publish output formats:
•

Responsive HTML5

•

WebHelp

•

Microsoft HTML Help

Apply a context-sensitive Help marker
1)

Click to place the mouse cursor at the start of a paragraph text to insert the context-sensitive
Help marker.

2)

Select Special > Publish Options > Apply CSH Marker.

3)

Enter the map ID and click OK.

When you create a CSH marker in a document, FrameMaker creates a TopicAlias marker with the
marker text as the map ID that you specify.
IMPORTANT:You cannot use whitespaces or the following special characters for the marker text of a

CSH marker: ~!@#$%^&*()+-={}|[]\\:\";'<>?,./
Creating and using a Context-sensitive Help map file
You apply CSH markers to specify context specific help location in your FrameMaker document.
Next, you need to create a Help map file (with a .h extension). Your application developers use the

220

Editing content
map file to hook the specific parts of the application (for example, dialog boxes or menu items) to the
corresponding help topics.
1)

Add the CSH markers in the FrameMaker source.

2)

Create a text file in any text editor and name the file as:
.h

3)

Place the map file in the FrameMaker source folder.

4)

For each CSH marker that you apply in your document, you need to create one line item in the
map file as follows:

#define